KIA 2014 Soul Owner's Manual

Kia, THE COMPANY

Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehicles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.

All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at the time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your specific Kia vehicle.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

F o r e w o r d

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replacement parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfaction.

Because subsequent owners require this important information as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is sold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.

Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2013 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.

All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in whole or in part without the written consent of Kia Motors

America, Inc.

Printed in Korea i

table of contents

Introduction

How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process /

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment

1

2

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag

Features of your vehicle

Keys / Door locks / Tailgate / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors

/ Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.

Driving your vehicle

Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system

Active ECO system / ISG (Idel Stop and Go) system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.

What to do in an emergency

Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.

Maintenance

Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /

Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

3

4

5

6

7

Index

8

I ii

Introduction

How to use this manual ............................................1-2

Fuel requirements ....................................................1-3

• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol ..................1-3

• Do not use methanol ......................................................1-4

• Fuel Additives ................................................................1-4

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ..1-6

1

Introduction

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAU-

TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you will learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents.

Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all located in the back of this manual.

Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

You will find various types of safety instructions in this manual. These instructions were prepared to enhance your personal safety.

Carefully read and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these instructions.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.

✽

NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.

1 2

Introduction

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having a pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of

87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with

UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

WARNING -

Refueling

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off.

Attempts to force more fuel into the tank can cause fuel overflow onto you and the ground causing a risk of fire.

• Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage, especially in the event of an accident.

Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. (Consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.)

✽

NOTICE

Tighten the cap until it clicks one time, otherwise the fuel cap open warning indicator light (or LCD display) will illuminate.

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol may be used in your vehicle. Do not use gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol.

Ethanol provides less energy than gasoline and it attracts water, and it is thus likely to reduce your fuel efficiency and could lower your MPG results.

Methanol may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system.

Discontinue using gasohol of anykind if drivability problems occur. Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty if they result from the use of:

1. Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.

2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

1 3

Introduction

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible

Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's engine and fuel system. Kia recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10 percent.

✽

NOTICE

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance problems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadi enyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Kia does not recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and affect your emission control system.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the cluster may come on.

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system.

✽

NOTICE

Your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol.

Fuel Additives

Kia recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline, which helps prevent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control

System. For more information on

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the website (www.toptiergas.com).

For Customers who do not use TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately may be added to the gasoline.

If

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive added to the fuel tank at 7,500 miles or every engine oil change is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

1 4

Introduction

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

VEHICLE HANDLING

INSTRUCTIONS

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.

Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles. It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as a conventional 2-wheel drive sedans or sports coupe. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure

to read the “Reducing the risk of a rollover” driving guidelines, in section 5 of this manual.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN

PROCESS

No special break-in period is needed.

By following a few simple precautions for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and

4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than

3 minutes at one time.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first

1,200 miles (2,000 km) of operation.

1 5

Introduction

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

* How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

* Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/ fastened;

* How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

* How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Your rights with respect to the information discussed above may vary from state to state. In some states, such information is considered private, is exclusively owned by the owner of the motor vehicle, and is not retrievable or usable by another person or entity.

1 6

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2

Your vehicle at a glance

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

■

Front view

2 2

❈

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Hood .....................................................4-30

2. Head lamp ...................................4-88, 7-78

3. Fog lamp .....................................4-91, 7-81

4. Tire and wheel...............................7-47, 8-4

5. Outside rearview mirror ........................4-49

6. Panoramic sunroof................................4-35

7. Front windshield wiper blades .....4-92, 7-40

8.Windows ................................................4-24

OPS013001N


■

Rear view

❈


9. Door ......................................................4-17

10. Fuel filler lid ........................................4-32

11. Rear combination lamp.......................7-83

12. Tail gate ..............................................4-22

13. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-85

14. Rear window defroster......................4-100

15. Antenna ............................................4-143

16. Rearview camera................................4-86

OPS013002N

2 3


INTERIOR OVERVIEW

2 4

❈


1. Inside door handle ................................4-18

2. Power window switch ............................4-24

3. Power window lock button.....................4-28

4. Central door lock switch ........................4-19

5. Outside rearview mirror control.............4-50

6. Outside rearview mirror folding .............4-51

7. Fuel filler lid open lever .........................4-32

8. Instrument panel illumination control switch ...................................................4-53

9. Steering wheel heater On/Off button ....4-43

10. Idle Stop and Go (ISG) OFF button....5-46

11. ESC Off button....................................5-32

12. Advanced Lighting Speaker ..............4-146

13. Steering wheel ....................................4-43

14. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever.....................................................4-42

15. Inner panel fuse panel ........................7-67

16. Hood release lever ..............................4-30

17. Seat.......................................................3-2

18. Transaxle shift lever ...................5-15, 5-19

OPS013004N

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

❈



1. Audio remote control buttons..............4-144

2. Driver’s front air bag .............................3-52

3. Horn ......................................................4-43

4. Cruise control button ............................5-40

5. Instrument cluster .................................4-52

6. Lighting control lever.............................4-88

7.Wiper and washer control lever .............4-92

8. Ignition switch or Engine start/stop button.............................................5-7, 5-10

9. Audio...................................................4-143

10. Hazard warning flasher.........................6-2

11. Climate control system ..........4-102, 4-112

12. Front seat warmer/

Seat air ventilation.................4-134, 4-135

13. Power outlet ......................................4-137

14. Center console storage box..............4-130

15. Glove box..........................................4-130

16. Passenger’s front air bag....................3-52

17. Parking brake......................................5-28

OPS013003N

2 5


ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1.6L GDI

2 6

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-34

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-27

3. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-27

4. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-29

5. Radiator cap .....................................7-31

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-32

7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-44

8. Negative battery terminal..................7-44

9. Fuse box ...........................................7-62

10. Air cleaner.......................................7-36

OPS073001

2.0L GDI

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.


1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-34

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-27

3. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-27

4. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-29

5. Radiator cap .....................................7-31

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-32

7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-44

8. Negative battery terminal..................7-44

9. Fuse box ...........................................7-62

10. Air cleaner.......................................7-36

OPS073002

2 7

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

•

Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

• Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

•

Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

• Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system . . . . . . 3-39

• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

• Do not Installing a child restraint on a front passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

•

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

•

Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

•

Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . 3-61

• SRS care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

• Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

• Adding equipment to or modifying your air bagequipped vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

3

Safety features of your vehicle

SEATS

Manual seat

Power seat

OPS033001N

Front seat

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height

(Driver’s seat)

(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)

(5) Headrest

Rear seats

(6) Seatback folding

(7) Headrest

3 2


WARNING

- Loose objects

Loose objects in the driver’s foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident.

Do not place anything under the front seats.

WARNING -

Uprighting seat

When you return the seatback to its upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly and be sure there are no other passengers around the seat. If the seatback is returned without being held and controlled, the back of the seat could spring forward resulting in accidental injury to a person struck by the seatback.

WARNING

-

Driver responsibility for front seat passenger

Riding in a vehicle with a front seatback reclined could lead to serious or fatal injury in an accident. If a front seat is reclined during an accident, the occupant’s hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt, applying great force to the unprotected abdomen. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result. The driver must advise the front passenger to keep the seatback in an upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Do not use a cushion that reduces friction between the seat and the passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop.

Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt cannot operate normally.

WARNING

- Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.

• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position of the seatback. Storing items against a seatback or in any other way interfering with proper locking of a seatback could result in serious or fatal injury in a sudden stop or collision.

• Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips. This is the best position to protect you in case of an accident.

(Continued)

3 3


3 4

(Continued)

• In order to avoid unnecessary and perhaps severe air bag injuries, always sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while maintaining comfortable control of the vehicle.

We recommend that your chest be at least 10 inches (25 cm) away from the steering wheel.

WARNING

- Rear seatbacks

• The rear seatback must be securely latched. If not, passengers and objects could be thrown forward resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or collision.

• Luggage and other cargo should be laid flat in the cargo area. If objects are large, heavy, or must be piled, they must be secured. Under no circumstances should cargo be piled higher than the seatbacks.

Failure to follow these warnings could result in serious injury or death in the event of a sudden stop, collision or rollover.

• No passenger should ride in the cargo area or sit or lie on folded seatbacks while the vehicle is moving. All passengers must be properly seated in seats and restrained properly while riding.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When resetting the seatback to the upright position, make sure it is securely latched by pushing it forward and backwards.

• To avoid the possibility of burns, do not remove the carpet in the cargo area. Emission control devices beneath this floor generate high temperatures.

WARNING

After adjusting the seat, always check that it is securely locked into place by attempting to move the seat forward or backward without using the lock release lever. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.


WARNING

- Damaged seats

If your vehicle has been in an accident, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Front seat adjustment - manual

Forward and backward

Seatback angle

WARNING

• Do not adjust the seat while wearing seat belts. Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on the abdomen.

• Use extreme caution so that hands or other objects are not caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving.

• Do not put a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may gush out of the lighter and cause fire.

OPS033002

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

OPS033003

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback recline lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

3 5


Seat height (for driver’s seat)

OPS033004

To change the height of the seat, push the lever upwards or downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever up several times.

Front seat adjustment - power

(if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion.

Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so you can easily control the steering wheel, pedals and switches on the instrument panel.

WARNING

The power seat is operable with the ignition OFF.

Therefore, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle.

CAUTION

• The power seat is driven by an electric motor. Stop operating once the adjustment is completed. Excessive operation may damage the electrical equipment.

• When in operation, the power seat consumes a large amount of electrical power. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, don’t adjust the power seat longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

• Do not operate two or more power seat control switches at the same time. Doing so may result in power seat motor or electrical component malfunction.

3 6

Forward and backward Seatback angle


Seat height (for driver’s seat)

OPS033005

Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seat to the desired position. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OPS033006

Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seatback to the desired angle. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OPS033007

Pull the front portion of the control switch up to raise or press down to lower the front part of the seat cushion. Pull the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or press down to lower the rear part of the seat cushion. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

3 7


Lumbar support (for driver’s seat) Headrest (for front seat)

OPS033008

The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the button.

OHM038048N

The driver's and front passenger's seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a rear collision.

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed.

Severe injury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrest position of the driver’s seat while the vehicle is in motion.

3 8


OPS033009

Forward and rearward adjustment

The headrest may be adjusted forward to 4 different positions by pulling the headrest forward to the desired detent. To adjust the headrest to it’s furthest rearward position, pull it fully forward to the farthest position and release it. Adjust the headrest so that it properly supports the head and neck.

OPS033010

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

OPS033011

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) while pulling the headrest up (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1).

Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

Make sure the headrest locks in position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.

3 9


Seatback pocket

OPS033016

The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passenger’s seatbacks.

Rear seat adjustment

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING

- Folded down seatback

Never allow passengers sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use.

This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING

-

Seatback pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets.

In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure vehicle occupants.

WARNING

- Objects

Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

3 10

OPS033017

OPS033015

To fold down the rear seatback

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket (if equipped) between the rear seatback and cushion, and insert the rear seat belt webbing in the guide to prevent the seat belt from being damaged.

2. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position.


OPS033018

4.Pull on the seatback folding lever, then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback backward by pulling on the folding lever.

Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked in place.

6.Return the rear seat belt to the proper position.

3 11


WARNING -

Uprighting seat

When you return the seatback to its upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. If the seatback is returned without holding it, the back of the seat could spring forward resulting in injury caused by being struck by the seatback.

WARNING

- Cargo

Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants. Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit the front seat occupants in a collision.

WARNING -

Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, the automatic transaxle is in P (Park) or the manual transaxle is in R

(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo.

Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position.

Headrest

*

*

OPA039053

The rear seat(s) is equipped with headrests in all the seating positions for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

3 12


WARNING -

Headrest adjustment

• For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height as the center of gravity of an occupant's head.

Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes.

Also adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed.

Severe injury to an occupant may occur in the event of an accident. Headrests may provide protection against severe neck injuries when properly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion.

Adjusting the height up and down

OPS033033

To raise the headrest :

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest :

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support

2. Lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

3 13


Removal and installation

WARNING

After installing the headrest, make sure that it is installed in the right direction.

A headrest installed reversely could increase whiplash injury during rear impact.

Armrest

OPS033034

To remove the headrest :

1. Raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) while pulling the headrest up (2).

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1).

2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.

Make sure the headrest locks in position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.

3 14

OPS033032

To use the armrest, pull it forward from the seatback.


SEAT BELTS

Seat belt restraint system

WARNING

• For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always be used whenever the vehicle is moving.

• Seat belts are most effective when seatbacks are in the upright position.

• Children age 12 and under must always be properly restrained in the rear seat.

Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he/she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. An improperly positioned shoulder belt can cause serious injuries in a crash.

The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over your shoulder across your collarbone.

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A twisted belt can't do its job well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt webbing is straight and not twisted.

• Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. If the belt webbing or hardware is damaged, replace it.

WARNING

Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.

Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid.

Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water.

The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.

(Continued)

3 15


(Continued)

It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious.

Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap.

WARNING

• No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt, be careful not to latch the seat belt in buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt and do not fasten and unfasten the seat belt repeatedly while driving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.

• When fastening the seat belt, make sure that the seat belt does not pass over objects that are hard or can break easily.

• Make sure there is nothing in the buckle. The seat belt may not be fastened securely.

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

1GQA2083

The driver's seat belt warning light and chime will activate pursuant to the following table when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

3 16


Conditions

Seat Belt

Vehicle

Speed

Unbuckled

Buckled

Buckled

→

Unbuckled

3 mph~

6 mph

6 seconds

6 seconds None

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds None

6 seconds

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

Unbuckled

↓

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

Warning Pattern

Light-Blink

Chime-

Sound

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off

(11 times)

6 seconds *

↓

Stop * 2

1

*

1

Warning pattern repeats 11 times with an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's seat belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

*

2

The light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking retractor

B180A01NF-1

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab

(1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

✽

NOTICE

If you are not able to pull out the seat belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

3 17


Front seat

OXM039026

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 3 positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt should not be too close to your neck.

The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder near the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

WARNING

• Verify that the shoulder belt anchor is locked into position at the appropriate height.

Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

Improperly positioned seat belts can cause serious injuries in an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of another collision leading to personal injury or death. Replace your seat belts after being in an accident as soon as possible.

B200A02NF

WARNING

You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly across your hips, not on your waist. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist, it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm that is near the door.

3 18


Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with combination locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems.

Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, it is strongly recommended that children always be seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt

(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).

It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend

(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).

Refer to “Using a child restraint system” in this section.

✽

NOTICE

Although the combination retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes, have the seated passengers use the emergency locking feature for improved convenience. The automatic locking function is intended to facilitate child restraint installation.

To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.

CAUTION

Do NOT fold down the left portion of the rear seat back when the rear center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the rear center seat belt before folding down the left portion of the rear seat back. If the rear center seat belt is buckled when the left portion of the rear seat back is folded down, distortion and damage to the top portion of the seat back and seat belt garnish may result, causing the seat back to lock into the folded down position.

3 19


Stowing the rear seat belt

B210A01NF-1

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button (1) on the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

OPS033017

The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion when not in use.

OPS033015

Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats.

After inserting the seat belt, tighten the belt webbing by pulling it up.

CAUTION

Remove the seat belt from the guides before using. If you pull on the seat belt when it is stored in the guides, it may damage the guides and/or belt webbing.

3 20


3 Point rear center belt

ORP032073C

To fasten the rear center belt

1.Insert the mini tongue (A) into the open end of the anchor connector

(C) until an audible “click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

WARNING -

Rear center seat belt

Do not separate mini tongue and mini buckle even if there is not an occupant.

If it is separated, It may hit the rear seat occupants in a collision or sudden stops.

ORP032074

2.Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert the tongue plate (B) into the open end of the buckle (D) until an audible “click” is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

CAUTION

When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the “CEN-

TER” mark must be used.

3 21


There will be an audible “click” when the tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips, if you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around.

If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

To unfasten the rear center belt

WARNING

When using the rear seat center belt, you must lock all tongue plates and buckles.

If any tongue plate or buckle is not locked, it will increase the chance of injury in the event of collision.

ORP032075

Press the release button on the buckle (D) and remove the tongue plate (B) from the buckle (D).

ORP032076K

When you fold the rear seatback

To retract the rear center seatbelt, insert the tongue plate or similar small rigid device into the web release hole (C). Pull up on the seat belt web (A) and allow the webbing to retract automatically.

3 22


Pre-tensioner seat belt

OXMA033101

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts (retractor pretensioner and

EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).

The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated, when a frontal collision is severe enough, together with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor may lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

(1) Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the shoulder belts fit in tightly against the occupant's upper body in certain frontal collisions.

(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)

The purpose of the EFD is to make sure that the pelvis belts fit in tightly against the occupant's lower body in certain frontal collisions.

If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.

WARNING

• Do not put anything near the buckle. Placing objects near the buckle may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.

• For your safety, be sure that the belt webbing is not loose or twisted and always sit properly on your seat.

3 23


OPS033036N/Q

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)

WARNING

To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly and adjusted to the proper position. Please read and follow all of the important information and precautions about your vehicle’s occupant safety features – including seat belts and air bags – that are provided in this manual.

2. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts properly.

✽

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passenger's seat belt pre-tensioner system may be activated not only in certain frontal collision but also in certain side collision or rollover, if the vehicle is equipped with a side or curtain air bag.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment.

These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

• Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the

SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position, and then it should turn off.

3 24


CAUTION

If the pre-tensioner seat belt system are not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the

SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt and

SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

WARNING

• Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be replaced after they have been worn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies.

• Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Improper handling of the pretensioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the warnings not to strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury.

• Always wear the seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle.

• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat belt must be discarded, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

3 25


Seat belt precautions

WARNING

All occupants of the vehicle must wear their seat belts at all times. Seat belts and child restraints reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries for all occupants in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Without a seat belt, occupants could be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle.

Properly worn seat belts greatly reduce these hazards.

Even with advanced air bags, unbelted occupants can be severely injured by a deploying air bag.

Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occupant seating contained in this manual.

Infant or small child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state.

Child and/or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. For more information about the use of these restraints, refer to “Child restraint system” in this section.

WARNING

Every person in your vehicle needs to be properly restrained at all times, including infants and children. Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior. Always use a child restraint appropriate for your child's height and weight.

✽

NOTICE

Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information.

Refer to “Child restraint system” in this section.

3 26


Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened and snugged on the hips and as low as possible. Check if the belt fits periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age

12) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position.

Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat.

NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system.

Restraint of pregnant women

Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific recommendations by their doctors.

The lap portion of the belt should be worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS

POSSIBLE.

WARNING

- Shoulder belts on small children

• Do not allow small children to ride in the vehicle without an appropriate child restrain system.

• Never allow a shoulder belt to be in contact with a child’s neck or face while the vehicle is in motion.

• If seat belts are not properly worn and adjusted on children, there is a risk of death or serious injury.

WARNING

- Pregnant women

Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the safety belt over the area of the abdomen where the fetus is located or above the abdomen where the belt could crush the fetus during an impact.

3 27


Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported.

When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the vehicle is moving.

A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front and rear seats are in a reclined position.

WARNING

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

The protection of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seat. Seat belts must be secured against your hips and chest to work properly. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater the chance an occupant's hips will slide under the lap belt causing serious internal injuries. Also, the shoulder belt may strike the occupant's neck.

Drivers and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

3 28

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after the rear seatback has been folded down, be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that the webbing or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt with damaged webbing or buckle could possibly fail during a collision or sudden stop, resulting in serious injury. If the webbing or buckles are damaged, get them replaced immediately.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized Kia dealer.


3 29


CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the vehicle should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided.

You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS).

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by seat belt, or by a tether anchor and/or

LATCH anchors (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat belts, and fits your child.

Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING

• A child restraint system must be placed in the rear seat.

Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat.

Should an accident occur and cause the passenger-side air bag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• A seat belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day, even if the outside temperature does not feel hot. Be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there.

• When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the cargo area or fasten it with a seat belt so that it will not be thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident.

• Children may be seriously injured or killed by an inflating air bag. All children, even those too large for child restraints, must ride in the rear seat.

3 30


WARNING

To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting in serious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use of the child restraint.

• Always make sure the child seat is secured properly in the vehicle and your child is securely restrained in the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the vehicle’s interior.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child causing serious internal injuries.

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle – not even for a short time.The vehicle can heat up very quickly, resulting in serious injuries to children inside. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows, or lock themselves or others inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or any two persons, to use the same seat belt.

• Children often squirm and reposition themselves improperly. Never let a child ride with the shoulder belt under their arm or behind their back.

Always properly position and secure children in the rear seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never allow a child to stand-up or kneel on the seat or floor of a moving vehicle. During a collision or sudden stop, the child can be violently thrown against the vehicle’s interior, resulting in serious injury.

• Never use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback, it may not provide adequate security in an accident.

• Seat belts can become very hot, especially when the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight.

Always check the seat belt buckles before fastening them over a child.

• After an accident, have an authorized Kia dealer check the child restraint system, seat belt, tether anchor and lower anchor.

• If there is not enough space to place the child restraint system because of the driver's seat, install the child restraint system in the rear right seat.

3 31


Using a child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Forward-facing child restraint system

For safety reasons, we recommend that the child restraint system be used in the rear seats.

CRS09

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, because of the danger an inflating passenger-side air bag could impact the rear-facing child restraint and kill the child.

Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock mode), you must manually change these seat belts to the auto lock mode to secure a child restraint.

OUN026150

For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. The child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3 32

WARNING

-

Child seat installation

• A child can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the vehicle and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint. Before installing the child restraint system, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operate as described in this section, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Kia dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual's instructions regarding child restraint systems and the instructions provided with the child restraint system could increase the chance and/or severity of injury in an accident.


Placing a passenger seat belt into the auto lock mode

E2MS103005

The auto lock mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following procedure.

OEN036101

To install a child restraint system on the outboard or center rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system in the seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound.

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

OEN036102

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child restraint) mode.

3 33


OEN036103

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

OEN036104

5. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the “Auto

Lock” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

WARNING

- Auto lock mode

The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns to the “emergency lock mode” whenever the belt is allowed to retract fully.Therefore, the preceding seven steps must be followed each time a child restraint is installed.

If the retractor is not in the

Automatic Locking mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops suddenly. A child can be seriously injured or killed if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the vehicle, including setting the retractor to the Automatic

Locking mode.

3 34


When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position, the retractor will automatically switch from the “Auto Lock” mode to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage.

Securing a child restraint seat with tether anchor system

OPS033019

Child restraint hook holders are located on the back of the rear seatbacks.

This symbol indicates the position of the tether anchor.

OXM039034N

1. Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat.

3 35


WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the vehicle and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint. Always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

WARNING

- Child restraint check

Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.

Securing a child restraint seat with child seat lower anchor system

WARNING

-

Tether strap

Never mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a single lower anchorage point.

The increased load caused by multiple seats may cause the tethers or anchorage points to break, causing serious injury or death.

WARNING

- Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints.

Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.

OXM039035

Some child seat manufacturers make child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children". These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two

LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats.

3 36


Lower Anchor

Position Indicator

Lower Anchor

OXM039060N

Child restraint symbols are located on the left and right 2nd row seat backs to indicate the position of the lower anchors for child restraints.

WARNING

• When using the vehicle's

"LATCH" system to install a child restraint system in the rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts.

Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.

• Do not place anything around the lower anchors. Also make sure that the seat belt is not caught in the lower anchors.

WARNING

Install the child restraint seat fully rearward against the seatback with the seatback reclined two positions from the most upright latched position.

3 37


OXM039036N

LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating position.

The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the 2nd row seat left and right outboard seating positions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or

LATCH-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint, assure that the seat is properly attached to the LATCH and tether anchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat before you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place.

CAUTION

Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing to get scratched or pinched by the child-seat latch and LATCH anchor during the installation.

WARNING

If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases.

WARNING -

LATCH lower anchors

LATCH lower anchors are only to be used with the left and right rear outboard seating positions.

Never attempt to attach a

LATCH equipped seat in the center seating position. You may damage the anchors or the anchors may fail and break in a collision.

3 38


AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side air bag

(4) Curtain air bag

WARNING

Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover.

❈

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

❈

3rd row seat : if equipped

OAM032026

3 39


How does the air bag system operate

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START position.

• The appropriate air bags inflate instantly in the event of a serious frontal collision or side collision in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.

• In addition to inflating in serious side collisions, side and/or curtain air bags will inflate if the sensing system detects a rollover.

• When a rollover is detected, curtain air bags will remain inflated longer to help provide protection from ejection, especially when used in conjunction with the seat belts.

• In order to help provide protection, the air bags must inflate rapidly.

The speed of the air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of the air bag design.

However, air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances under which contact with the steering wheel or passenger air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel or passenger air bag.

3 40


WARNING

• To avoid severe personal injury or death caused by deploying air bags in a collision, the driver should sit as far back from the steering wheel air bag as possible (at least 10 inches (250 mm) away). The front passengers should always move their seats as far back as possible and sit back in their seat.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of a collision, and passengers may be injured by the air bag expansion force if they are not in a proper position.

• Air bag inflation may cause injuries including facial or bodily abrasions, injuries from broken glasses or burns.

Noise and smoke

When inflated, the air bags make a loud noise and leave smoke and powder in the air inside the vehicle.

This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. Open your doors and/or

windows as soon as possible after impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are nontoxic, it may cause irritation to the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists.

WARNING

When the air bags deploy, the air bag related parts in the steering wheel and/or instrument panel and/or in both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors are very hot. To prevent injury, do not touch the air bag storage area’s internal components immediately after an air bag has inflated.

3 41


Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger’s seat.

1JBH3051

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the air bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

WARNING

• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it!

• Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries.

• When children are seated in the rear outboard seats of vehicle equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, be sure to install the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and securely lock the child restraint system in position.

Inflation of side and/or curtain air bags could cause serious injury or death to an infant or child.

Air bag warning light

W7-147

The purpose of air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag system, which could include your side and/or curtain air bags used for rollover protection.

3 42


SRS components and functions

, ,

, ,

OPS033035N/Q

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side air bag modules

4. Curtain air bag modules

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors

10. PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF” indicator (Front passenger’s seat only)

11. Occupant detection system

(Front passenger’s seat only)

12. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buckle sensors

13. Emergency fastening device

(EFD)

14. Side pressure impact sensor

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components while the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

W7-147

If the air bag warning light illuminated for more than, 6 seconds after the ignition is turned on, or of it illuminates during vehicle operation, an

SRS component may not be functioning properly and you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

3 43


Driver’s front air bag (1) Driver’s front air bag (2)

WARNING

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction in the air bag system. Have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition switch is in ON position.

B240B01L

The front air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the

SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

B240B02L

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags.

3 44

Driver’s front air bag (3) Passenger’s front air bag

B240B03L

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

B240B05L

WARNING

• Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle with a passenger's air bag. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.

(Continued)


(Continued)

• When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface.

It may become a dangerous projectile and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.

3 45


WARNING

• If an air bag deploys, there may be a loud noise followed by a fine dust released in the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous

- the air bags are packed in this fine powder. The dust generated during air bag deployment may cause skin or eye irritation as well as aggravate asthma for some persons. Always wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly with lukewarm water and a mild soap after an accident in which the air bags were deployed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• The SRS can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on after illuminating for about 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly.

If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK position and remove the ignition switch. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Failure to observe this warning will cause the SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.

Occupant Detection System

(ODS)

OPS033020

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat.

The occupant detection system is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. Only the front passenger front air bag is controlled by the Occupant

Detection System.

WARNING

Do not put anything in front of the passenger air bag indicator.

3 46


Main components of the occupant detection system

• A detection device located within the front passenger seat cushion.

• An electronic system which determines whether the passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.

• A indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG

“OFF” indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the occupant detection system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system determines to be of appropriate size, and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), the PASSENGER

AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off and the front passenger's air bag will be able to inflate, if necessary, in frontal crashes.

You will find the PASSENGER AIR

BAG “OFF” indicator on the center facia panel. This system detects the conditions 1~4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly (sitting upright with the seat in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the safety belt properly) for the most effective protection by the air bag and the safety belt.

• The ODS (Occupant Detection

System) may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can defeat the detection system.

These include:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.

(2) Leaning against the door or center console.

(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front of the seat.

(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or resting them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.

(7) Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear or hip protection wear.

(8) Put on the seat an additional thick cushion.

3 47


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system

Devices

Condition detected by the occupant detection system

1. Adult or child* 1

Indicator/Warning light

"PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator light

Off

SRS warning light

Off

Front passenger air bag

2. Child restraint system* 2

3. Unoccupied

On

On

Off

Off

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

4. There is a malfunction in the system

Off

On

Activated

* 1 : The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the air bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS, thus allowing the air bag to deploy. To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat.

* 2 : Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's seat when it is unoccupied by a passenger adversely affects the Occupant

Detection System (ODS). Your

ODS is designed to resist electronic waves, but do not place an electronic device (ex. laptop computer, after market DMB/navigation/satellite audio, video game machine, MP3, etc.) on or near the seat cushion since it may defeat the proper functioning of the ODS or turn on the air bag warning light.

(Continued)

3 48


(Continued)

OVQ036013N

- Never put a heavy load or an active electronic device on the front passenger seat or seatback pocket.

1KMN3663

- Never sit with hips shifted towards the front of the seat.

1KMN3665

- Never place feet on the dashboard.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front passenger seatback.

1KMN3662

- Never excessively recline the front passenger seatback.

1KMN3664

- Never lean on the door or center console.

- Never sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

3 49


Proper position

B990A01O

When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.

WARNING

- “AIR BAG

OFF” light

Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the

PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a crash.

The driver must instruct the passenger to reposition himself in the seat.

Failure to properly position yourself may lead to air bag deactivation resulting in air bag non-deployment and in a collision. If the PASSENGER AIR

BAG “OFF” indicator remains illuminated after the passenger repositions themselves properly and the car is restarted, it is recommended that passenger move to the rear seat because the passenger's front air bag will not deploy.

✽

NOTICE

The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds.

WARNING

Do not put a heavy load or an active electronic device (ex. laptop computer, after market

DMB/navigation/satellite audio, video game machine, MP3, etc.) in the front passenger seatback pocket or on the front passenger seat. Do not hang onto the front passenger seat. Do not hang any items such as seatback table on the front passenger seatback.

Do not place feet on the front passenger seatback. Do not place any items under the front passenger seat. Any of these could interfere with proper sensor operation or turn on the air bag warning light.

3 50


WARNING

• Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant detection system, never install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat.

A deploying air bag can forcefully strike a child resulting in serious injuries or death. Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat. Children too large for child restraints should use the available lap/shoulder belts.

No matter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG

“OFF” indicator is illuminated when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), have that person sit in the rear seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the front passenger seat is occupied by a child who is not in a CRS, the "PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF" indicator may or may not be on and the passenger air bag may or may not deploy in a collision. Have the child move to a rear seat to increase their safety.

• Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or attach anything such as a blanket or seat heater to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detection system.

• Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat.

These may damage the occupant detection system, if they puncture the seat cushion.

• Do not use accessory seat covers on the front seats.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear, as opposed to the front seat. It is recommended that child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.

• Air bags can only be used once – have an authorized Kia dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment.

• The occupant detection system may not work properly if water, coffee or any other liquid including rain gets on the seat. Keep the front seat dry at all times.

(Continued)

3 51


(Continued)

• Do not place an electronic device (ex. laptop computer, after market DMB/navigation/ satellite audio, video game machine, MP3, etc.) on the front passenger seat. Its electronic field may cause the ODS to switch to the "on" condition and thus turn on the air bag warning light or allow the passenger air bag to deploy needlessly in a collision, increasing your repair costs.

WARNING

If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the

SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate because the passenger's front air bag is connected with the occupant detection system.

If there is a malfunction of the occupant detection system, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the front passenger's seat. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the occupant detection system and the

SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

Driver's and passenger's front air bag

Driver’s front air bag

Passenger’s front air bag

OPS033021

OPS033022

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Advanced Supplemental Restraint

(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating position.

3 52


The indication of the system's presence are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on the air bag pad cover on the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity.

WARNING

If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the

SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate because the SRS air bag warning light is connected with the occupant detection system.

If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position, remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the advanced SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

These sensors provide the ability to control the SRS deployment based on whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation with two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.

A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts.

The passenger’s front air bag is designed to help reduce the injury of children sitting close to the instrument panel in low speed collisions.

However, children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat.

The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened.

According to the impact severity and seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS

Control Module) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

3 53


Additionally, your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat. The occupant detection system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger's seat and will turn off the front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more detail, see

"Occupant detection system" in this section.

WARNING

• Modification to the seat structure can cause the air bag to deploy at a different level than should be provided.

• Do not place any objects underneath the front seats as they could damage and/or interfere with the occupant detection system.

WARNING

Manufacturers are required by government regulations to provide a contact point concerning modifications to the vehicle for persons with disabilities, which modifications may affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag system. That contact is Kia’s tollfree Customer Assistance center at 1-800-333-4Kia. However,

Kia does not endorse nor will it support any changes to any part or structure of the vehicle that could affect the advanced air bag system, including the occupant detection system.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Specifically, the front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be replaced except by an authorized Kia dealer using original Kia parts designed for this vehicle and model. Any other such replacement or modification could adversely affect the operation of the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags. For the same reason, do not attach anything to the seat, dashboard or door, even temporarily. If the system is adversely affected, it could cause severe personal injuries or death in a collision.

3 54


✽

NOTICE

• Be sure to read information about the SRS on the labels provided on the sunvisor.

• Advanced air bags are combined with pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front air bags are not intended to deploy in collisions in which sufficient protection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.

WARNING

Always use seat belts and child restraints – every trip, every time, everyone! Air bags inflate with considerable force and in the blink of an eye. Seat belts help keep occupants in proper position to obtain maximum benefit from the air bag. Even with advanced air bags, improperly and unbelted occupants can be severely injured when the air bag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occupant safety contained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries and receive the maximum safety benefit from your restraint system:

• Never place a child in any child or booster seat in the front seat.

• ABC – Always Buckle

Children in the 2nd Row seat.

It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Front and side air bags can injure occupants improperly positioned in the front seats.

• Move your seat as far back as practical from the front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

• You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags. Improperly positioned drivers and passengers can be severely injured by inflating air bags.

• Never lean against the door or center console – always sit in an upright position.

• Do not allow a passenger to ride in the front seat when the

PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a moderate or severe frontal crash.

(Continued)

3 55


(Continued)

• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel or the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

• Never place covers, blankets or aftermarket seat warmers on the passenger seat as these may interfere with the occupant detection system.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system.

Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the SRS air bag warning light remains illuminated while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible.

• Air bags can only be used once – have an authorized Kia dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploy the front air bags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle. Additionally, the air bags will only deploy once.

Seat belts must be worn at all times.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Front air bags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front air bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.

(Continued)

3 56

Rear impact

Side impact

Rollover


OEP036096N

OVQ036018N

(Continued)

• Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant detection system, do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an air bag deployment in case of an accident.

• Children age 12 and under must always be properly restrained in the rear seat.

Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

(Continued)

1VQA2091

(Continued)

• For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bag while the vehicle is in motion.

• Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. All occupants should sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the ignition key is removed or the engine is shut off.

(Continued)

3 57


(Continued)

• The SRS air bag system must deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

Side air bag

OPS033023

• The side air bags are designed to deploy during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

• The side and/or curtain air bags do not only deploy on the side of the impact but also on the opposite side.

• The side and/or curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle will deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected.

• The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

OPS033037

❈


Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

WARNING

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.

3 58


WARNING

• The side air bag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in operation.

• For best protection from the side air bag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side air bag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps.

• Do not use any accessory seat covers.

• Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bag.

• Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself.

• Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deployment of the side air bag that may result in personal injury, avoid impact to the side impact sensor when the ignition switch is on.

• If seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized

Kia dealer. Inform the dealer that your vehicle is equipped with side air bags and an occupant detection system.

Curtain air bag

OPS033024

OPS033038

❈


Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

3 59


They are designed to help protect occupants in certain side impacts and to help prevent them from ejecting out of the vehicle as a result of a rollover, especially when the seatbelts are also in use.

• The curtain air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

• The side and/or curtain air bags do not only deploy on the side of the impact but also on the opposite side.

• Also, the curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle will deploy in certain rollover situations.

• The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

WARNING

• In order for side and curtain air bags to provide the best protection, front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened.

Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat.

• When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies against the doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side impact and/or curtain air bags.

• Never try to open or repair any components of the side and curtain air bag system. This should only be done by an authorized Kia dealer.

Failure to follow the above mentioned instructions can result in injury or death to the vehicle occupants in an accident.

3 60


Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection.

These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

1

2 3 4

OPS033025N/OPS033026/OPS033027/OPS033028/OPS033029

(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor

(4) Side pressure sensor

3 61


WARNING

• Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air bag deployment, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

• If the installation location or angle of the sensors is altered in any way, the air bags may deploy when they should not or they may not deploy when they should, causing severe injury or death.

Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are changed due to the deformation of the front bumper, front end module, body or front doors and/or B pillar where side collision sensors are installed. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Installing bumper guards (or side step or running board) or replacing a bumper (or front door module) with non-genuine parts may adversely affect your vehicle’s collision and air bag deployment performance.

Air bag inflation conditions

1VQA2084

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

3 62


OVQ036018N

OPS033039

❈


Side air/or curtain air bags

Side air bags (side and/or curtain air bags) are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

Also, the side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when a rollover is detected by a rollover sensor.

Although the front air bags (driver’s and front passenger’s air bags) are designed to inflate in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient frontal force in another type of impact. side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions. They may inflate in other type of collisions where a side force is detected by the sensors. Side air bag and/or curtain air bags may also inflate where rollover sensors indicate the possibility of a rollover occurring (even if none actually occurs) or in other situations, incluiding when the vehicle is tilted while being towed. Even where side and/or curtain air bags would not provide impact protection in a rollover, however, they will deploy to prevent ejection of occupants, especially those who are restrained with seat belts.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

3 63


Air bag non-inflation conditions

1VQA2086

• In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.

OUN036087

• Air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.

OVQ036018N

• Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

3 64


1VQA2089

• In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

1VQA2090

• Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to “ride” under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance.

Air bags may not inflate in this

"under-ride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such “under-ride” collisions.

1VQA2091

• Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because front airbag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

3 65


SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and so there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

1VQA2092

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger’s panel, front seats and roof rails must be performed by an authorized Kia dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

• Modification to SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water.

Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.

• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

3 66


(Continued)

• If the air bags inflate, they must be replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental inflation of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

• If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed.

An authorized Kia dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.

• If your vehicle was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on flooring, you shouldn't try to start the engine; have the vehicle towed to an authorized Kia dealer.

Additional safety precautions

• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-

down back seat. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor.

• Passengers should not move

out of or change seats while the

vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed to

restrain one occupant. If more than one person uses the same seat belt, they could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

• Do not use any accessories on

seat belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place

hard or sharp objects between themselves and the air bags.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap or in your mouth can result in injuries if an air bag inflates.

• Keep occupants away from the

air bag covers. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor. If occupants are too close to the air bag covers, they could be injured if the air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objects

on or near the air bag covers.

Any object attached to or placed on the front or side air bag covers could interfere with the proper operation of the air bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags.

3 67


• Do not place items under the

front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.

• Never hold an infant or child on

your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

WARNING

• Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury or death.

• Always sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor.

• Always have the ignition OFF when the vehicle is being towed or where it may otherwise be tilted, since the side and/or curtain air bags may inflate if the sensors interpret those tilt angles as a potential rollover.

• Be careful not to cause impact to the doors when the ignition is ON.The air bags may inflate.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

3 68

Air bag warning label

OAM039041

OPS033030

Air bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to the sunvisor to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.


3 69

Features of your vehicle

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-17

• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-18

• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

• Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

• Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

• Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

• FLEX steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

4

4

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

• Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

• Headlamp escort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

• High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

• Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

• Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

• Interior lamp auto cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

• Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

• Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111

Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-113

• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

• Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126

• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

• Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

• Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135

• Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

• Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

• Mounting bracket for roof carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

• Audio remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

• Aux, USB and iPod

® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145

• Advanced lighting speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146

4

Features of your vehicle

KEY

Record your key number

The key code number is stamped on the key code tag attached to the key set.

Should you lose your keys, this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe and handy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operations

■

Type A

■

Type B

OED036001A

• To unfold the key, press the release button (1) then the key will unfold automatically. To fold the key, fold the key manually while pressing the release button (1).

CAUTION

Do not fold the key without pressing the release button.

This may damage the key.

OXMA043331

• Used to start the engine.

• Used to lock and unlock the doors.

WARNING

Use only Kia original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle.

If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage to the starter motor and possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.

4 4


WARNING

- Ignition key

(smart key)

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with the Ignition key

(smart key) is dangerous even if the key is not in the ignition switch or start button is ACC or

ON position. Children copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition switch or press the start button. The

Ignition key (smart key) would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or even death. Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the engine is running.

Door Lock (1)

OXMA043317

1. Close all doors, engine hood and tailgate.

2. Press the lock button(1).

3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The hazard warning lights will blink once.

4. If the lock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds, the hazard warning lights will blink and the horn will sound once.

5. Make sure that doors are locked by checking the door lock button inside or pulling the outside door handle.

Door Unlock (2)

1. Press the unlock button(2).

2. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twice within 4 seconds and all doors and tailgate will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

✽

NOTICE

You can activate or deactivate the

Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to

"User settings" in this chapter.

4 5


Tailgate unlock (3)

The tailgate is unlocked if the button is pressed for more than 1 second.

Also, once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate will be locked automatically.

Panic (4)

The horn sounds and hazard warning lights flash for about 30 seconds if this button is pressed for more than

1 second. To stop the horn and lights, press any button except the trunk button on the transmitter.

Transmitter precautions

✽

NOTICE

The transmitter will not work if any of following occur:

• The ignition key is in the ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance limit (about 30 feet [10 m]).

• The battery in the transmitter is weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio substation or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the transmitter is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phones normal operational signals. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the transmitter and your mobile phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

4 6


Battery replacement

OYDDCO2005

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery which will normally last for several years. When replacement is necessary, use the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter center cover.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery is positioned battery.

3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see an authorized Kia dealer for transmitter reprogramming.

• The transmitter is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

•

• Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and may cause human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION -

Transmitter damage

Do not drop, wet or expose the keyless entry system transmitter to heat or sunlight.

Immobilizer system

(if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks and determines and verifies if the ignition key is valid.

If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.

4 7


To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽

NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts. Keep each key separate in order to avoid a starting malfunction.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your

Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.

✽

CAUTION

Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch.

Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may prevent the engine from being started.

NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, contact an authorized

Kia dealer.

CAUTION

The transponder in your ignition key is an important part of the immobilizer system.

It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction and should only be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobilizer system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

4 8

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.


4 9


SMART KEY

Record your key number

The key code number is stamped on the key code tag attached to the key set.

Should you lose your keys, this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe and handy place, but not in the vehicle.

Smart key function

OXMA043316

To remove the mechanical key, press and hold the release button(1) and remove the mechanical key (2).

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

With a smart key, you can lock or unlock a door (and Tailgate) and start the engine.

Refer to the following for more details.

WARNING -

Smart key

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with the smart key is dangerous. Unattended children mimic adults and they could press the engine start/stop button which would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or even death. Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

4 10


Door Lock

OPS043010

Using the door handle button

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Close all doors, engine hood and tailgate.

3. Press the button of the outside door handle.

4. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once.

5. Make sure that doors are locked by pulling the outside door handle.

✽

NOTICE

• The button will only operate when the smart key is within 28~40 in.

(0.7~1m) from the outside door handle.

• Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for 3 seconds if any of following occur:

- The smart key is in the vehicle.

- The engine start/stop button is in ACC or ON position.

- Any door except the tailgate is open.

OXMA043316/Q

Using the button on the smart key

1 Close all doors, engine hood and tailgate.

2. Press the lock button(1).

3. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once.

4. Make sure that doors are locked by pulling the outside door handle.

4 11


Unlocking

Using the door handle button


2. Press the button of the driver's outside door handle.

3. The driver’s door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

4. Press the button twice within 4 seconds and all doors and the tailgate will unlock and the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

❈

If you press the button of the front passenger’s outside door handle while carrying the smart key, all doors will unlock.

✽

NOTICE

• The button will only operate when the smart key is within 28~40 in.

(0.7~1m) from the outside door handle.

• When the smart key is recognized in the area of 28~40 in. (0.7~1m) from the front outside door handle, other people can also open the doors.

• After unlocking the driver’s door or all doors, the door(s) will lock automatically unless the door is opened.


1. Press the unlock button(2) of the smart key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twice within 4 seconds and all doors and the tailgate will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

✽

NOTICE

After pressing the button, the doors will lock automatically unless any door is opened within 30 seconds.

✽

NOTICE

You can activate or deactivate the

Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to

"User settings" in this chapter.

4 12


Tailgate unlocking

Using the tailgate handle button


2. Press the tailgate handle button.

3. When all doors are locked, the hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate will lock automatically.

✽

NOTICE

The button will only operate when the smart key is within 28~40in.

(0.7~1m) from the tailgate handle.


1. Press the tailgate unlock button(3) for more than 1 second.

2. When all doors are locked, the hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Panic

1. Press the panic button(4) for more than 1 second.

2. The horn sounds and hazard warning light flash for about 30 seconds.

✽

NOTICE

To stop the horn and lights, press any button on the smart key.

Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting the key. For detailed information refer to the “Engine start/stop button” in chapter 5.

Loss of the smart key

A maximum of 2 smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle.

If you happen to lose your smart key, you will not be able to start the engine. You should immediately take the vehicle and remaining key to your authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehicle, if necessary) to protect it from potential theft.

4 13


Smart key precautions

• The smart key will not work if any of the following occur:

- The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the smart key.

- The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

• When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key and contact an authorized Kia dealer.

• If the smart key is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the smart key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making a call, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart key and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.

CAUTION

Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or other liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

Smart key immobilizer system

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the smart key and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, whenever you turn the engine start/stop button to the ON position by pressing the button while carrying the smart key, it checks and determines and verifies if the smart key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.

4 14


To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Turn the engine start/stop button to the ON position by pressing the button while carrying the smart key.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the engine start/stop button to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically.

Without a valid smart key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽

NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts. Keep each key separate in order to avoid a starting malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not put metal accessories near the smart key.

The engine may not start because the metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal from transmitting normally.

CAUTION

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your

Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.

✽

NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, contact an authorized

Kia dealer.

CAUTION

The transponder in your smart key is an important part of the immobilizer system.

It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction and should only be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobilizer system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

4 15


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.


1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.


OPS043002

A smart key battery should last for several years, but if the smart key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one. If you are unsure how to use your smart key or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

1. Remove the mechanical key.

2. Pry open the rear cover.

3. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery position.

4. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

• The smart key is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can cause the smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the smart key, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION -

Smart key damage

Do not drop, get wet or expose the smart key to heat or sunlight, or it will be damaged.

4 16


DOOR LOCKS

.

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle

■

Type A

Unlock

Lock

■

Type B

Unlock

Lock

OPS043011

• Turn the key clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock.

• If you lock the driver's door with a key

- all vehicle doors will lock automatically. (for normal key)

- only the driver's door will lock. (for folding key, smart key)

• From the driver's door

- turn the key to the left once to unlock the door and once more within 4 seconds to unlock all doors. (for normal key).

- turn the key to the left once to unlock the driver's door. (for folding key, smart key.

• Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter.

• Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure the doors are closed securely.

✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

WARNING

• If you don’t close the door securely, the door may open again.

• Be careful that someone’s body and hands are not trapped when closing the door.

4 17


Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

✽

NOTICE

Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

Unlock

Lock

OPS043012

• To lock a door without the key, push the inside door lock button (1) or central door lock switch (2) to the “Lock” position and close the door (3).

• If you lock the door with the central door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors will lock automatically.

OPS043013

• To unlock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The red mark (2) on the button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the driver’s (or front passenger’s) door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button will unlock and the door will open. (if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if the ignition key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened.

4 18


WARNING

- Door lock malfunction

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the key to unlock the door from outside.

• Move to the cargo area and open the tailgate.

With central door lock switch

Driver’s door

Passenger’s door

OPS043014

• When pressing the rear portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the front portion (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

OPS043015

Operate by pressing the central door lock switch.

• When pressing the front portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

4 19


WARNING -

Doors

• The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door. Locked doors will also discourage potential intruders when the vehicle stops or slows down.

• Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door.

Opening a door when something is approaching can cause damage or injury.

WARNING

-

Unlocked vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can invite theft or possible harm to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle while you are gone. Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING

- Unattended children

An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Furthermore, children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle.

Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle.

Impact sensing door unlock system

In the event of air bag deployment resulting from a vehicle impact, all doors will automatically unlock.

Auto door lock/unlock feature

(if equipped)

• All doors will automatically lock when the transaxle shift lever is shifted out of P(Park).

• All doors will automatically unlock when the transaxle shift lever is shifted into P (Park).

4 20


Speed sensing door lock system (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically locked after the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3

mph (15 km/h). And all doors will be automatically unlocked when you turn the engine off or when you remove the ignition key.

✽

NOTICE

You can select some auto door lock/unlock features in “User

Settings” as follows;

• Speed sensing auto door lock

• Auto door unlock when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch or engine is turned off.

• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting the shift lever out of P(Park) or into P(Park).

For more information, refer to

“User Settings” in this chapter.

Child-protector rear door lock

OPS043016

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock located on the rear edge of the door to the lock ( ) position. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open even when the inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle.

Even though the doors may be unlocked, the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle (1) until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked.

WARNING

- Rear door locks

If children accidentally open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out of the vehicle, resulting in severe injury or death. To prevent children from opening the rear doors from the inside, the rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

4 21


TAILGATE

Opening the tailgate

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

Closing the tailgate

WARNING

The tailgate swings upward.

Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.

OPS043017

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked when all doors are locked or unlocked with the key, transmitter

(or smart key) or central door lock switch.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened by pressing the handle switch and then pulling the handle up.

• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tailgate unlock button on the smart key is pressed (if equipped). Once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate is locked automatically.

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.

OPS043018

To close the tailgate, lower and push down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that the tailgate is securely latched.

WARNING

Make sure your hands, feet and other parts of your body are safely out of the way before closing the tailgate.

4 22


WARNING

-

Exhaust fumes

If you drive with the tailgate open, you may draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to vehicle occupants.

If you must drive with the tailgate opened, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle.

WARNING

-

Rear cargo area

Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.

Emergency tailgate safety release

OPS043019

Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the cargo area, the tailgate can be opened by pushing the release lever and pushing open the tailgate.

WARNING

• For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release lever in the vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the cargo area.

• No one should be allowed to occupy the cargo area of the vehicle at any time. The cargo area is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.

• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use with extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.

4 23


WINDOWS

OPS043020

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window up/down

(7) Power window lock switch

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

4 24


Power windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to operate.

Each door has a power window switch that controls the door's window. The driver has a power window lock button which can block the operation of the rear passenger windows.

The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position.

However, if the front doors are opened, the power windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period.

✽

NOTICE

While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) in an open (or partially open) position, your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing

OPS043021

The driver’s door has a master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle.

To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).

4 25


Auto down window (if equipped) Auto up/down window

(if equipped)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Close the driver’s window and continue pulling up the driver’s power window switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed.

OPS043203

Pressing the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the driver’s window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, momentarily pull up the switch to the opposite direction of the window movement.

OPS043022

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or raises the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

If the power window does not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

4 26


OUN026013

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body, the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement. The window will then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

The distance may vary based on the size or position of the window. If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).

And if the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.

✽

NOTICE

The automatic reverse feature for the driver’s window is only active when the “auto up” feature is used by fully pulling up the switch. The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.

WARNING

Always check for obstructions before raising any window to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

If an object less than 4 mm (0.16

in.) in diameter is caught between the window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse direction.

4 27


Power window lock button

OPS043023

• The driver can disable the power window switches on the passenger doors by pressing the power window lock button located on the driver’s door to the LOCK position

(pressed).

• When the power window lock

switch is pressed :

- The driver's master control can operate all the power windows.

- The front passenger's control can operate the front passenger's power window.

- The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passenger's power window.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in the opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

4 28

WARNING -

Windows

• Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the engine is running.

• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows, or otherwise injure themselves or others.

• Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver’s door power window lock button in the LOCK position (pressed). Serious injury can result from unintentional window operation by the child.

• Do not extend heads or any limbs outside the window while the vehicle is in motion.


4 29


HOOD

Opening the hood

OPS043024

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

OPS043025

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, pull the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).

3. Raise the hood. It will completely rise by itself after it has been raised about halfway.

WARNING

Open the hood after turning off the engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift lever to the P

(Park) position for automatic transaxle and to the 1st (First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual transaxle, and setting the parking brake.

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the following:

• All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly installed.

2. Lower the hood halfway and push down to securely lock in place.

WARNING

• Before closing the hood, ensure that all obstructions are removed from the hood opening. Closing the hood with an obstruction present in the hood opening may result in property damage or severe personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment.

Doing so may cause a heatinduced fire.

4 30

WARNING

• Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with the hood raised. The view will be blocked and the hood could fall or get damaged.

WARNING

ODMNMC2034

When you check the engine compartment, Take caution to avoid contacting your head with the safety hook which is located inside of the hood.


4 31


FUEL FILLER LID

Opening the fuel filler lid

OPS043026

The fuel filler lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel filler lid opener.

If the fuel filler lid does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid

(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

OPS043027

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel filler lid opener button.

3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).

4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel filler cap (2) counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until it “clicks” once. This indicates that the cap is securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in lightly making sure that it is securely closed.

✽

NOTICE

There may be an intermittent noise near the refueling hole while the engine is idling if the fuel cap is not closed securely. This occurs normally with the OBD system.

✽

NOTICE

When refueling fully at an up hill, the fuel gauge may not point to the F position.

It is not a malfunction. If you move your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel gauge will move to the full position.

4 32


WARNING

- Refueling

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks once, otherwise the fuel cap open warning indicator light will illuminate

• Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

WARNING -

Refueling dangers

Automotive fuels are flammable materials. When refueling, please note the following guidelines carefully. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death by fire or explosion.

• Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station facility.

• Before refueling, note the location of the Emergency

Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station facility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling since you can generate static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.

(Continued)

4 33


(Continued)

• When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling.

Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.

Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When refueling, always shut the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed, before starting the engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling.

Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire.

• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire department or 911.

Follow any safety instructions they provide.

CAUTION

• Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the “Fuel requirements” suggested in chapter 1.

• If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

• After refueling, make sure the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

4 34


PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• After a vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

OPS043028

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof glass control lever located on the overhead console (1).

CAUTION

Do not continue to pull or push the sunroof glass control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted.

Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

✽

NOTICE

The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the slide position but can be slid while in a tilt position.

WARNING

• Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

• If you would like to carry items on the roof rack using a cross bar, do not operate the sunroof.

• When carrying cargo on the roof rack, do not load heavy items above the sunroof or glass roof.

• All occupants of the vehicle must wear their seat belts at all times. Seat belts and child restraints reduce serious or fatal injuries for all occupants in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

4 35


Sunroof open warning

(if equipped)

Sliding the sunroof

When the sunshade is opened

If you pull the sunroof glass control lever backward, the sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof glass movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

OPS043120

If the driver removes the ignition key

(smart key: turns off the engine) when the sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for a few seconds and a message will appear on the LCD display or warning indicator will illuminate.

Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.

OPS043029

When the sunshade is closed

If you pull the sunroof control lever backward, both the sunshade and sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control glass lever momentarily.

To close the sunroof glass pull (or push) the sunroof glass control lever downward (or forward).

• Type A

When you push the sunroof glass control lever forward or pull it downward, the sunshade will be closed halfway and glass will be closed at the same time. And then sunshade will be fully closed finally.

• Type B

When you push the sunroof glass control lever forward or pull it downward while the sunshade opened, the glass will be closed.

4 36


Automatic reversal

OXM049029

If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash.

You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

Tilting the sunroof

OPS043030

Before opening or closing the sunroof, open the sunshade (refer to the following page for instructions on how to use the sunshade).

To tilt up the sunroof

- Push the sunroof glass control lever upward.

❈

When you push the sunroof glass control lever upward while the sunshade closed, the sunshade will be opened halfway and then glass will be tilt up.

To tilt down (or close) the sunroof

- Push the sunroof glass control lever forward or pull it downward

• Type A

When you push the sunroof glass control lever forward or pull it downward while the sunshade opened, the sunshade will be closed halfway and then glass will be tilt down and then sunshade will be fully closed finally.

• Type B

When you push the sunroof glass control lever forward or pull it downward while the sunshade opened, the glass will be tilt down.

4 37


WARNING -

Sunroof

• Be careful that no head, hands and body parts are obstructed by a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend the face, neck, arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.

• Make sure your hands and head are safely out of the way before closing a sunroof.

• A panoramic sunroof is made of glass, therefore it may break in an accident. If you do not have your seat belt on, you may contact the broken glass and get injured or killed.

For all passengers safety, have the seat belts on. (ex.

seat belt, CRS, etc.)

CAUTION

• Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged.

• Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is opened.

Sunshade

OPS043031

To open the sunshade

Press the sunshade open button (1).

To stop the sliding at any point, press the sunshade control switch momentarily.

4 38


To close the sunshade when the sunroof glass is closed

- Press the sunshade close button (2).

❈

When you press the sunshade close button(2) with the sunroof glass opened

• Type A

The sunshade will be closed halfway.

• Type B

The sunshade will be closed halfway, then sunroof glass will be closed and then sunshade will be fully closed finally.

- Push the sunroof control lever forward or pull it down.

To stop the sliding at any point, press the sunshade control switch momentarily.

✽

NOTICE

Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as material characteristic are normal.

CAUTION

• Do not pull or push the sunshade by hand as such action may damage the sunshade or cause it to malfunction.

• Close the sunroof when driving in dusty environments.

Dust may cause a malfunction of the vehicle system.

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, you must reset your sunroof system as follows:

1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2.Close the sunshade and sunroof completely if opened.

3.Release the sunroof control lever.

4.Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close (about

10 seconds) until the sunroof moves a little. Then, release the lever.

4 39


5.Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close, until the sunroof operates as follows again:

The sunshade and sunroof glass slide open

→

The sunroof glass slide close

→

The sunshade close

Then, release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof system has been reset.

✽

NOTICE

If you do not reset the sunroof, it may not work properly.

4 40


STEERING WHEEL

Electric power steering (EPS)

The power steering uses a motor to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort.

The motor driven power steering is controlled by a power steering control unit which senses the steering wheel torque and vehicle speed to command the motor.

The steering becomes heavier as the vehicle’s speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed decreases for optimum steering control.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

CAUTION

• If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may require increased steering effort. Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

• When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will likely disappear.This is a normal condition.

• When the vehicle is stationary, when the steering wheel is turned all the way to the left or right continuously, the steering wheel becomes harder to turn. The power assist is limited to protect the motor from overheating.

As time passes, the steering wheel return to its normal condition.

✽

NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

• The EPS warning light does not illuminate.

• The steering gets heavy immediately after turning the ignition switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics are completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

• A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the ignition switch is turned to the ON or

LOCK (OFF) position.

• A motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

• If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate abnormally.

Take your vehicle to an authorized

Kia dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

(Continued)

4 41


(Continued)

• When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will likely disappear. This is a normal condition.

• When the charging system warning light comes on due to the low voltage (When the alternator or battery) does not operate normally or it malfunctions), the steering wheel may require increased steering effort.

Tilt and telescopic steering

Tilt and telescopic steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.

WARNING

• Never adjust the angle of the steering wheel while driving.

You may lose steering control and cause severe personal injury, death or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position.

OPS043032

To change the steering wheel angle, pull down the lock-release lever (1), adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and height (3, if equipped) then pull up the lockrelease lever to lock (4) the steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving.

4 42


Heated steering wheel

(if equipped)

OPS043033

With the ignition switch in the ON position, pressing the heated steering wheel button warms the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button once again. The indicator on the button will turn off.

✽

NOTICE

The heated steering wheel will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering wheel is turned on.

Horn

CAUTION

• Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel. This causes damage to the heated steering wheel system.

• When cleaning the heated steering wheel, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the steering wheel.

• If the surface of steering wheel is damaged by sharp object, damage to the heated steering wheel components could occur.

OPS043034

To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly.

✽

NOTICE

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

4 43


CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

FLEX STEER

OPS043036

The FLEX STEER controls steering effort based upon as driver's preference or road condition.

You can select the desired steering mode by pressing the FLEX STEER button.

OPS043209

When the steering mode button is pressed, the selected steering mode will appear on the instrument cluster.

If the steering mode button is pressed within 4 seconds, the steering mode will change as shown above.

If the steering wheel mode button is not pressed for about 4 seconds, the

LCD display will change to the previous screen (for Type B cluster).

4 44

Normal mode Sport mode


Comfort mode

OPS043129

The normal mode offers medium steering effort.

OPS043130

The steering wheel becomes heavier. The sport mode is usually used when driving on the highway.

OPS043131

The steering wheel becomes lighter.

The comfort mode is usually used when driving in the city or when parking the vehicle.

4 45


CAUTION

• For your safety, if you press the steering mode button while operating the steering wheel, but the steering effort will not change immediately.

After operating the steering wheel, the steering effort will change automatically to the selected mode.

• Use caution when changing the steering mode while driving.

• When the electronic power steering is not operating properly, the flex steering wheel will not work.

4 46


MIRRORS

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that the center view through the rear window is seen. Make this adjustment before you start driving.

WARNING -

Rear visibility

Do not place objects in the rear seat or cargo area which would interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING

Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving.

This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause death, serious injury or property damage.

WARNING

Do not modify the inside mirror and don’t install a wide mirror. It could result in injury, during an accident or deployment of the air bag.

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Night

Day

OAM049023

Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

4 47


Electric chromic mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions. The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light level around the vehicle, and automatically controls the headlight glare from the vehicles behind you.

When the engine is running, the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror.

Whenever the shift lever is shifted into reverse (R), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.

CAUTION -

Cleaning mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner.

Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. It may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Indicator Sensor

OAM042349L

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.

Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

4 48


Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust the mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an automatic vehicle wash or when passing through a narrow street.

WARNING -

Rearview mirrors

• The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

CAUTION

Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should restrict the movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water.

CAUTION

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force.

Use an approved spray de-icer

(not radiator antifreeze) to release the frozen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving.This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause death, serious injury or property damage.

4 49


Remote control

OPS043035

Electric type

The electric remote control mirror switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror the ignition switch should be in the ACC position. Move the switch (1) to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.

After the adjustment, put the switch into the neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

CAUTION

• The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed.

Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand. Doing so may damage the parts.

Folding the outside rearview mirror

OPS043037

Manual type

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

4 50


OPS043038

Electric type

The outside rearview mirror can be folded or unfolded by pressing the switch as below.

Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.

Right (2) : The mirror will fold.

Center (AUTO, 3) :

The mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows:

• Without smart key system

- The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the transmitter.

• With smart key system

- The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the smart key.

- The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the button on the outside door handle.

- The mirror will unfold when you approach the vehicle (all doors closed and locked) with a smart key in possession. (if equipped)

CAUTION

- Electric type outside rearview mirror

The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the ignition switch is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don’t fold it by hand. It could cause motor failure.

4 51


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

■

Type A

■

Type B

4 52

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. LCD display

6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)

7. Turn signal indicator lights

❈

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in this chapter.

OPS043100N/OPS043101N

Instrument Cluster Control

Adjusting Instrument Cluster

Illumination

■

Type A


LCD Display Control

■

Type A

OPS043117

■

Type B

OPS043202

■

Type B

OPS043039

The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is changed by pressing the illumination control button

("+" or "-") when the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the tale lights are turned on.

OTF044112L

• If you hold the illumination control button ("+" or "-"), the brightness will be changed continuously.

• If the brightness reaches to the maximum or minimum level, an alarm will sound.

OPS043040

The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons on the steering wheel.

4 53


[For type A cluster]

(1) TRIP : TRIP button for changing trip modes

(2) RESET : RESET button for resetting items

Gauges

Speedometer

■

Type A

[For type B cluster]

(1) : MODE button for changing modes or SELECT button for setting the selected item

(2) : MOVE button for changing items or RESET button for resetting the selected item

❈

For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD

Display” in this chapter.

■

Type B

Tachometer

■

Type A

OPS043102N

■

Type B

OPS043104N

OPS043103N

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).

OPS043106

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

4 54


Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

■

Type A

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine damage.

■

Type B

CAUTION

If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the “H” position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to “If the

Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.

OPS043108

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could severely burn. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

OPS043109

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button is ON.

4 55


Fuel Gauge

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043110

✽

NOTICE

• The fuel tank capacity is given in chapter 8.

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

OPS043111

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

WARNING -

Fuel Gauge

Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the “E (Empty)” level.

CAUTION

Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.

✽

NOTICE

Fuel display may not be accurate if you are filling in sloping places.

4 56


Odometer

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043112

Outside Temperature Gauge

■

Type A

■

Type B

The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately like a gv thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive.

OPS043114N

To change the temperature unit (from

°C to °F or from °F to °C)

• Type A Cluster

Press the RESET button 5 times and then press the Trip button 5 times within 10 seconds.

• Type B Cluster

The temperature unit can be changed by using the "User

Settings" mode of the LCD display

❈

For more details, refer to “LCD

Display” in this chapter.

OPS043118

The odometer Indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles or kilometers.

OPS043119

This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).

- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F

(-40°C ~ 60°C)

4 57


Transaxle Shift Indicator

Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator

■

Type A

• Park : P

• Reverse : R

• Neutral : N

• Drive : D

• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator

(if equipped)

■

Type A

OPS043115 OPS043116

■

Type B

■

Type B

OTF044125L

This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.

4 58

OTF044402

This indicator informs which gear is desired while driving to save fuel.

• Shifting up :

▲

2,

▲

3,

▲

4,

▲

5,

▲

6

• Shifting down :

▼

1,

▼

2,

▼

3,

▼

4,

▼

5

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the

3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th, or 6th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.


4 59


LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)

LCD Modes (for type B cluster)

Modes Symbol

Trip Computer

Explanation

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.

For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

Turn By Turn

(if equipped)

A/V

(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

Service

This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages related to TPMS and so on.

Master warning

User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.

❈

For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.

4 60


Service Mode

Service Interval

OPS043134N

Service in

It calculates and displays when you need a scheduled maintenance service (mileage or days).

If the remaining mileage or time reaches 900 mi. (1,500 km) or 30 days, "Service in" message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the ignition switch or Engine

Start/Stop Button to the ON position.

OTF044196L

Service required

If you do not have your vehicle serviced according to the already inputted service interval, “Service required” message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position (The mileage and time changes to "---").

To reset the service interval to the mileage and days you inputted before:

- Press the RESET button for more than 1 second.

OTF044192L

Service in OFF

If the service interval is not set,

“Service in OFF” message is displayed on the LCD display.

✽

NOTICE

If any of the following conditions occurs, the mileage and days may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

4 61


Master Warning Mode

(if equipped)

• This warning light informs the driver the following situations

- TPMS (if equipped)

- Service reminder (if equipped)

The Master Warning Light illuminates when more than one of the above warning situations occur. At this time, the LCD Modes Icon will change from ( ) to ( ).

If the warning situation is solved, the

LCD Modes Icon will be changed back to its previous icon ( ).

User Settings Mode

Description

OPS043132

On this mode, you can change setting of the doors, lamps, and so on.

Door

Auto Door Lock (if equipped)

• Off:

The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.

• Speed (for manual transaxle)

All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph (15km/h).

• Shift Lever:

All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shifted from the P

(Park) position to the R (Reverse),

N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

4 62


Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)

• Off:

The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.

• Key Out or Power Off:

All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button is set to the OFF position.

• Shift Lever:

All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.

Two Press Unlock (if equipped)

• Off:

The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door is unlocked.

• On:

The driver’s door will unlock if the door is unlocked. When the door is unlocked again within 4 seconds, all doors will unlock.

Lamp

One Touch Turn Lamp (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the headlamp delay and headlamp welcome function will be activated.

Horn Feedback (if equipped)

• Off:

The Horn feedback operation will be deactivated.

• On:

After locking the door by pressing the lock button on the transmitter, if you press the lock button again within 4 seconds, the warning sound will operate once to indicate that all doors are locked.

4 63


Settings

Language

Choose the language you prefer within the LCD.

Service Interval

A/V Mode (if equipped)

Temperature Unit

Convert the temperature unit from °C to °F or from °F to °C.

Welcome Sound

If this item is checked, the welcome sound function will be activated.

OPS043133

On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage

(mi. or km) and period (months).

AVG Fuel Eco Reset

• Auto Reset:

The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.

• Manual Reset:

The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.

For more details, refer to “Trip

Computer” in this chapter.

OTF044129

This mode displays the state of the

A/V system.

4 64


Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped) Warning Messages

Shift to "P" position (for smart key system and automatic transaxle)

Low Key Battery

(for smart key system)

OPS043208N

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

OTF044148L

• This warning message illuminates if you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in P (Park) position.

• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop

Button turns to the ACC position (If you press the Engine Start/Stop

Button once more, it will turn to the

ON position).

OTF044142L

• This warning message illuminates if the battery of the smart key is discharged when the Engine

Start/Stop Button changes to the

OFF position.

4 65


Press brake pedal to start engine

(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)

Press clutch pedal to start engine

(for smart key system and manual transaxle)

Key not in vehicle


OTF044152L

• This warning message illuminates if the Engine Start/Stop Button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal.

• It means that you should depress the brake pedal to start the engine.

OTF044190L

• This warning message illuminates if the Engine Start/Stop Button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the clutch pedal.

• It means that you should depress the clutch pedal to start the engine.

OTF044138L

• This warning message illuminates if the smart key is not in the vehicle while the door is opened or closed with the ignition switch in the ACC position or engine is running.

• It means that you should always have the smart key with you.

4 66

Key not detected


Press start button again



Press start button with smart key


OTF044140L

• This warning message illuminates if the smart key is not detected when you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button.

OTF044144L

• This warning message illuminates if you can not operate the Engine

Start/Stop Button when there is a problem with the Engine Start/Stop

Button system.

• It means that you could start the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/ Stop Button once more.

• If the warning illuminates each time you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

OTF044146L

• This warning message illuminates if you press the Engine Start/Stop

Button while the warning message

“Key not detected” is illuminating.

• At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.

4 67


Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"


Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine


Door Open

OTF044157L

• This warning message illuminates if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.

• It means that you should replace the fuse with a new one. If that is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in the ACC position.

OTF044150L

• This warning message illuminates if you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position.

✽

NOTICE

You can start the engine with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

But, for your safety, we recommend that you start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

OPS043121

• It means that any door is open.

4 68

Tailgate Open Sunroof Open (if equipped)


Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"

(if equipped)

OPS043122

• It means that the tailgate is open.

OPS043120

• The warning message illuminates if you turn off the engine when the sunroof is open.

OTF044154L

• This warning message illuminates if the fuse switch on the fuse box is

OFF.

• It means that you should turn the fuse switch on.

For more details, refer to “Fuses” in chapter 7.

4 69


TRIP COMPUTER

Overview

Description

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving.

✽

NOTICE

Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example

Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

Trip Modes (for Type A cluster)

Tripmeter A

Tripmeter B

Range

Average Fuel Economy*

Average Vehicle Speed*

Trip Modes (for Type B cluster)

FUEL ECONOMY

• Range

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

TRIP A

• Tripmeter [A]

• Average Vehicle Speed [A]

• Elapsed Time [A]

Elapsed Time*

* if equipped

To change the trip mode, press the

TRIP button.

TRIP B

• Tripmeter [B]

• Average Vehicle Speed [B]

• Elapsed Time [B]

To change the trip mode, press the

MOVE button .

4 70

Trip A/B

■

Type A

■

Type B


Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.

- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi.

or km

• To reset the tripmeter, press the

RESET/ button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed.

OPS043125

OPS043127N

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset.

- Speed range: 160 MPH or 200 km/h

• To reset the average vehicle speed, press the RESET/ button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.

✽

NOTICE

• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance is less than 0.03 miles (50 meters) or the driving time is less than 10 seconds since the ignition switch or Engine

Start/Stop button is turned to ON.

• Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the average vehicle speed keeps going while the engine is running.

Elapsed Time (3)

• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time reset.

- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59

• To reset the elapsed time, press the RESET/ button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the elapsed time is displayed.

✽

NOTICE

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the elapsed time keeps going while the engine is running.

4 71


Fuel Economy

Range (1)

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043123

• If the estimated distance is below

30 mi. (50 km), the trip computer will display “---” as distance to empty.

✽

NOTICE

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the distance to empty function may not operate correctly.

• The distance to empty may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.

• The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters

(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The fuel economy and distance to empty may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.

- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9

MPG or L/100km

• The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automatically.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the RESET/ button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy is displayed.

OPS043128N

• The range to empty is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.

- Distance range : 30 ~ 1999 mi or

50 ~ 1999 km.

4 72

Automatic reset

To make the average fuel economy be reset automatically whenever refueling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in

User Setting menu of the LCD display

(Refer to “LCD Display”).

Under “Auto Reset” mode, the average fuel economy will be cleared to zero (---) when the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).

✽

NOTICE

The average fuel economy is not displayed for more accurate calculation if the vehicle does not drive more than 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50 meters) since the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button is turned to ON.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instant fuel economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).

- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 99.9

MPG or L/100km


4 73


WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning lights

Air bag Warning Light Seat Belt Warning Light

✽

NOTICE -

Warning lights

Make sure that all warning lights are OFF after starting the engine. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with the SRS.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to the “Seat

Belts” in chapter 3.

4 74


Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light




- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds

- It remains on if the parking brake is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in reservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more details, refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).

Then check all brake components for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the brake system is still found, the warning light remains on, or the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle.

In this case, have your vehicle towed to an authorized Kia dealer and inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

4 75


WARNING -

Parking Brake

& Brake Fluid Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light





• When there is a malfunction with the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system).


Electronic

Brake force

Distribution

(EBD) System

Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally.


WARNING -

Electronic

Brake force Distribution

(EBD) System Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking.

In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

4 76


✽

NOTICE

- Electronic Brake force Distribution

(EBD) System

Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake &

Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS

Warning Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

Electronic Power

Steering (EPS) Warning

Light (if equipped)

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)




- It remains on until the engine is started.

• When there is a malfunction with the EPS.






• When there is a malfunction with the emission control system.


CAUTION -

Malfunction

Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

Driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy.

4 77


CAUTION -

Gasoline

Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

Charging System

Warning Light





• When there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system:


2. Turn the engine off and check the alternator drive belt for looseness or breakage.

If the belt is adjusted properly, there may be a problem in the electrical charging system.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

4 78


Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light





• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:


2. Turn the engine off and check the engine oil level (For more details, refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION -

Engine Oil

Pressure

Warning Light

• If the engine does not stop immediately after the Engine

Oil Pressure Warning Light is illuminated, severe damage could result.

• If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, it indicates that there may be serious engine damage or malfunction. In this case,

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine is started, turn the engine off immediately.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

Low Fuel Level Warning

Light


When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

If the fuel tank is nearly empty:

Add fuel as soon as possible.

CAUTION -

Low Fuel

Level

Driving with the Low Fuel Level warning light on or with the fuel level below “0 or E” can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).

4 79


Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light





• When one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated (The location of the underinflated tires are displayed on the LCD display).

For more details, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

This warning light remains on after blinking for approximately 60 seconds or repeats blinking and off at the intervals of approximately 3 seconds:

• When there is a malfunction with the TPMS.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

For more details, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

WARNING

- Low tire pressure

• Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

• Continued driving or low pressure tires will cause the tires to overheat and fail.

WARNING -

Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

4 80


Door Ajar Warning Light Sunroof Open Warning


Indicator Lights

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator

Light


When a door is not closed securely.


When the sunroof is not closed securely.

Tailgate Open Warning

Light

Fuel cap open warning indicator (if equipped)


When the tailgate is not closed securely.


• When the fuel filler cap is not tighten securely.

Always make sure that the fuel filler cap is tight.

This indicator light illuminates:




• When there is a malfunction with the ESC system.


This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

4 81


Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light





• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.

ECOMINDER

® indicator

Active ECO system

ECO

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (Without Smart Key)

(if equipped)


When the Active ECO button is pressed the ECOMINDER

® indicator

(green) will illuminate to show that the Active ECO is operating.

For more detailed information, refer to "Active ECO" in chapter 5.


• When the vehicle detects the immobilizer in your key properly while the ignition switch is ON.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.


• When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.


4 82


Immobilizer Indicator

Light (With Smart Key)

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates for up to 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle properly while the Engine Start/Stop Button is ACC or ON.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few seconds:

• When the smart key is not in the vehicle.

- At this time, you can not start the engine.

This indicator light illuminates for 2 seconds and goes off:

• When the vehicle can not detect the smart key which is in the vehicle while the Engine Start/Stop

Button is ON.



• When the battery of the smart key is weak.

- At this time, you can not start the engine. However, you can start the engine if you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button with the smart key. (For more details, refer to

“Starting the Engine” in section 5).

• When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.


Turn Signal Indicator

Light


• When you turn the turn signal light on.

If any of the following occurs, there may be a malfunction with the turn signal system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

Kia dealer.

- The indicator light does not blink but illuminates.

- The indicator light blinks more rapidly.

- The indicator light does not illuminate at all.

4 83


High Beam Indicator

Light

Light ON Indicator Light Cruise Indicator Light

(if equipped)

CRUISE


• When the headlights are on and in the high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.


• When the tail lights or headlights are on.

Front Fog Indicator



• When the cruise control system is enabled.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.


• When the front fog lights are on.

4 84

Cruise SET Indicator


SET

FLEX STEER indicator

(if equipped)

SPORT NORMAL COMPORT


• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.


• When you press the FLEX STEER mode button.

For more details, refer to "FLEX

STEER" in chapter 4.


4 85


REAR CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)

This system is a supplemental system that helps the driver by displaying objects behind the vehicle when backing up.

Always keep the camera lens clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not operate normally.

OPS043050

OPS043051

The rear camera display will activate when the back-up light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.

WARNING

- Rear camera display

The rear camera display is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle. While the camera's display is generally accurate, objects can be much closer than they appear in the display screen and can be distorted in both size and proportion.

WARNING

- Relying on the Rear-Camera Display

Never rely solely on the rear camera display when backing.

You must always use methods of viewing the area behind you including looking over both shoulders as well as continuously checking all three rear view mirrors. Due to the difficulty of ensuring that the area behind you remains clear, always back slowly and stop immediately if you even suspect that a person, and especially a child, might be behind you.

4 86


LIGHTING

Headlamp escort (if equipped)

If you turn the ignition switch to the

ACC or OFF position with the headlights ON, the headlights remain on for about 5 minutes. However, if the driver’s door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlights can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the transmitter (or smart key) twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or Auto position. However, if you turn the light switch to the Auto position when it is dark outside, the headlights will not be turned off immediately.

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the parking lights when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door (in that order).

• With this feature, the parking lights will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of the road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Daytime running light

(if equipped)

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) may help make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system turns OFF when:

1. The front fog light or headlight (low beam) switch is ON.

2. The engine is OFF.

3. The parking brake is applied.

4 87


Lighting control

Parking light position ( ) Headlight position ( )

OXM049110

The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

OAM049041

When the light switch is in the parking light position (1st position), the tail, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON.

OAM049042

When the light switch is in the headlight position (2nd position), the head, tail, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON.

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlights.

4 88


Auto light position (if equipped)

OMD040095

When the light switch is in the AUTO light position, the taillights and headlights will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

• Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrument panel. This will ensure better autolight system control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using a window cleaner. The cleaner may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work properly.

High beam operation

OAM049044

To turn on the high beam headlights, push the lever away from you. Pull it back for low beams.

The high beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.

4 89


Turn signals and lane change signals

OAM049043

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the normal (low beam) position when released. The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature.

WARNING

- High beams

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.

OAM049045

The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.

4 90

One-touch lane change function

To activate an one-touch lane change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it.

The lane change signals will blink 3,

5 or 7 times.

You can choose one-touch lane change blinking function in "One touch turn lamp" of "User setting".

Refer to "User setting" in chapter 4.

✽

NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, the bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped)

OAM049046N

Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch (1) is turned to the on position after the headlight is turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light switch (1) to the OFF position.

When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor.


4 91


WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer

(if equipped)

Windshield wipers

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

OAM049100N/OAM049048N

D : Rear wiper/washer control

· ON – Continuous wipe

· INT – Intermittent wipe

(if equipped)

· OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

OAM049101N

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push the lever upward and release it with the lever in the OFF position. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed upward and held.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in light rain or mist.

To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1).

4 92


LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

Windshield washers

The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side.

CAUTION

- Washer pump

To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

OAM049102N

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles.

Use this function when the windshield is dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir.

WARNING

- Obscured visibility

Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first warming the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision.

4 93


CAUTION

- Wipers& windshields

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped)

OAM049103N

The rear window wiper switch is located at the end of the wiper and washer switch lever. Turn the switch to the desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer.

ON - Normal wiper operation

INT - Intermittent wiper operation

(if equipped)

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

OXM049125

Push the lever away from you to spray rear washer fluid and to run the rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

4 94


INTERIOR LIGHT

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

WARNING

- Interior light

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. The glare from the interior lights may obstruct your view and cause an accident.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

• When all entrances are closed, if you lock the vehicle by using the transmitter or the smart key, all interior lamp will be off after a few seconds.

• If you do not operate anything in the vehicle after turning off the engine, the lights will turn off after

20 minutes.

Map lamp

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043052

OPS043053

Press the lens (1) or button (1) to turn the map lamp on or off

4 95


• ROOM (2) :

- The map lamp and room lamp stays on at all times.

- To turn off the ROOM mode, press the ROOM button (2) once again (not pressed.)

• DOOR (3) :

- The map lamp and room lamp comes on when a door is opened.

The lamps go out after approximately 30 seconds.

- The map lamp and room lamp comes on for approximately 30 seconds when doors are unlocked with a transmitter or smart key as long as the doors are not opened.

- The map lamp and room lamp will stay on for approximately 20 minutes if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or

LOCK/OFF position.

- The map lamp and room lamp will stay on continuously if the door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position.

- The map lamp and room lamp will go out immediately if the ignition switch is changed to the ON position or all doors are locked.

- To turn off the DOOR mode, press the DOOR button (3) once again (not pressed).

✽

NOTICE

• When the lamp is turned on by pressing the lens (1), the lamp does not turn off even if the DOOR mode or ROOM mode is not selected (not pressed).

• If the ROOM button and DOOR button are pressed at the same time, the map lamp and room lamp will stay on at all times

(ROOM mode will be selected).

Room lamp

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043054

OPS043072

Press the button to turn the light on or off.

If the front map lamp turns on by the front map lamp switch, the room lamp will turn on.

4 96

Luggage room lamp

■

Type A

Portable lamp usage

(if equipped)

OPS043055

■

Type B

OPS043056

The luggage room lamp comes on when the tailgate is opened.

The lamp comes on as long as the tailgate is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the tailgate securely after using the luggage room.

OPS043197

1. In-vehicle lamp, if necessary, after separation can be used as a portable.

2. Press push button (1).

3. Pull out the lamp holder.

4. Press the power switch (2).


❈

If the portable lamp does not turn on, it means the portable lamp needs to be charged. Insert the lamp holder and then charge it again. The charge mode will be activated if the ignition switch (or engine start/stop button) is on position or engine is running.

4 97


CAUTION

1. Remove the batteries when not in use for a long time.

2. Use the specified battery.

3. You can use the regular batteries (Disposable batteries) but do not use the Nonrechargeable battery in charge mode. It may damage the vehicle.

4. Do not place the lamp with water or moist places and liquid compounds. These can cause internal leakage of a battery.

5. When replacing the batteries, check the direction and insert.

It will not be charged if installed reversely.

6. Do not mix the rechargeable batteries.

It may not be charged normally.

(Continued)

(Continued)

7. Do not place the lamp or batteries near fire or heat. It can cause internal leakage of a battery.

8. Do not apply electrical shock with portable charging terminals of the lamp.

It can cause internal leakage of a battery or damage the portable lamp.

9. If the portable lamp does not turn on anymore after charged, replace the rechargeable batteries.


OTAM041101

When replacement is necessary, use the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently try open the battery cover.

2. Replace the batteries with new rechargeable batteries (AAA size).

When replacing the batteries, make sure the position of batteries.

3. Close the cover carefully.

4 98

Glove box lamp (if equipped) Vanity mirror lamp

(if equipped)

OPS043057

The glove box lamp comes on when the glove box is opened.

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the glove box securely after using the glove box.

OAM042336

Pull the sunvisor downward and you can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or

OFF by pushing the button.

• : To turn the lamp ON.

• O : To turn the lamp OFF.

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, turn off the lamp by pushing the O button after using the lamp.


4 99


DEFROSTER

CAUTION

- Conductors

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to “Windshield defrosting and defogging” in this section.

Rear window defroster

■

Type A

■

Type B

■

Type C

OPS043150

OPS043153

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the rear window, while the engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

OPS043152

4 100

Outside rearview mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

Front wiper deicer (if equipped)

The front wiper deicer will operate at the same time you turn on the front windshield defroster.

• To turn off the wiper deicer, press the front windshield defroster button again.

• The front wiper deicer automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off.


4 101


MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

4 102

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Air intake control button

3. Mode selection knob

4. Rear window defroster button

5. Temperature control knob

6. Air conditioning button

(if equipped)

OPS043154

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.


OPS043058

4 103


Mode selection

Vent mode (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Floor/Defrost mode

(A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E) Defrost mode (A, D)

OPS043155

The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent.

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor mode (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

4 104


Temperature control

OPS043059

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

OPS043156

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flow from the ventilation system.

To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right position for warm air or left position for cooler air.

OPS043159

To operate the MAX A/C, turn the temperature knob to extreme left. Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically.

4 105


Air intake control

OPS043160

The air intake control is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

WARNING

- Recirculated air

Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.

WARNING

- Reduced visibilty

Continued use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

4 106

Fan speed control To turn off the blowers


Air conditioning (if equipped)

OPS043157

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation.

The fan speed knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flow from the ventilation system. To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed, or left for lower speed. To turn the fan speed control off, turn the knob to the “0” position.

OPS043158

To turn off the blowers, turn the fan speed control knob to the "0" position.

OPS043161

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

4 107


System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.




Heating





5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.


All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.


3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position, set the mode control to the MAX A/C position, then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

4 108


CAUTION

- Excessive

A/C

When using the air conditioning system, monitor the engine coolant closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating and potential engine damage.

Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

4 109


Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

Outside air

Recirculated air

Blower

Climate control air filter

Evaporator

Heater core core

1LDA5047

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter every 15,000 miles or once a year.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized Kia dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle and personal injury may occur.

4 110

Air Conditioning refrigerant label

■

Example

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below ;

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

OXM063009

❈

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail location of air conditioning refrigerant label.


4 111


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■

Type A

■

Type B

1. Temperature control button / knob

2. Front windshield defroster button

3. Rear windshield defroster button

4. Climate control display

5. Air intake control button

6. Air conditioning button (if equipped)

7. Fan speed control button

8. AUTO (automatic control) button

9. OFF button

10. Mode selection button

11. Climate control information screen selection button

OPS043162/OPS043163

4 112


Automatic heating and air conditioning

■

Type A

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043164

■

Type B

OPS043170

✽

NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation off, select any button or switch of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Air conditioning button

- Front windshield defroster button

- Air intake control button

- Fan speed control switch

The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.

• Regardless of the temperature setting, when using automatic operation, the air conditioning system can automatically turn on to decrease the humidity inside the vehicle, even if the temperature is set to warm.

OPS043165

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicated by AUTO on the display. The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by temperature setting.

OPS043171

2. Push the temperature control button to set the desired temperature.

(Type A)

Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.

(Type B)

4 113


OPS043071

Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual heating and air conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button.

In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button (or turning any knob) except AUTO button while automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.




6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

Mode selection

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043166

OPS043167

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Refer to the illustration in the

“Manual climate control system”.

4 114


The air flow outlet port is converted as follows:

Vent mode (B, D) Floor mode (C, E, A, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defroster.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is discharged towards the face and floor.

Floor/Defrost mode

(A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

4 115


■

Type A

Temperature control

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043168

OPS043059

Instrument panel vents

The outlet port can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

■

Type B

OPS043169

Defrost mode (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

OPS043170

OPS043171

• Type A

The temperature will increase to the maximum (HI) by pushing the button

( ).

4 116


The temperature will decrease to the minimum (Lo) by pushing the button

( ).

When pushing the button, the temperature will increase or decrease by

0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.

• Type B

The temperature will increase to the maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the right extremely.

The temperature will decrease to the minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the left extremely.

When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by

0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.

Temperature scale conversion

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Centigrade.

This is normal condition. You can switch the temperature scale as follows;

While pressing the AUTO button, press the OFF button for 3 seconds or more. The temperature scale will change from Centigrade to

Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to

Centigrade.

The temperature unit (from °C to °F or from °F to °C) can be changed by using the “User Settings” mode of the

LCD display.

Air intake control

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043172

OPS043173

This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

4 117


Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the button illuminates when the recirculated air position is selected.

With the recirculated air position selected, air from passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the button does not illuminate when the outside (fresh) air position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

WARNING

- Recirculated air

Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

WARNING

- Reduced visibility

Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating in recirculated air position will cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

4 118

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected, will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

Fan speed control

■

Type A

OPS043176


To change the fan speed, press the button ( ) for higher speed, or push the button ( ) for lower speed. To turn the fan speed control off, press the OFF button and select outside

(fresh) air position.

■

Type B

OPS043177

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by pressing the fan speed control button.

4 119


Air conditioning

■

Type A

Blower OFF

■

Type A

Climate information screen selection (if equipped)

■

Type B

■

Type B

OPS043174

■

Type B

OPS043178

OPS043180

Press the climate information screen selection button to view climate information in full screen mode.

OPS043175

Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).

Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

OPS043179

Push the OFF button to turn off the blower. However you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the position ON.

4 120


System operation

Ventilation





Heating





5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.


All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.


3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position, set the mode control to the MAX A/C position, then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

4 121


CAUTION

- Excessive

A/C

When using the air conditioning system, monitor the engine coolant closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating and potential engine damage.

Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

4 122


Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

Outside air

Recirculated air

Blower

Climate control air filter

Evaporator

Heater core core

1LDA5047

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter every 15,000 miles or once a year.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized Kia dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle and personal injury may occur.

4 123


Air Conditioning refrigerant label

■

Example

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below ;

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

OXM063009

❈

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail location of air conditioning refrigerant label.

4 124


WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING

- Windshield heating

Do not use the or position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to the lower speed.

• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grille to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

OPS043181

1. Select any fan speed except “0” position.

2. Select desired temperature.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside

(fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

4 125


To defrost outside windshield

OPS043182

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.

3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windshield

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS043183

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will be turned on according to the detected ambient temperature, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed will be selected automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button or knob manually.

If the position is selected, with a low fan speed, a higher fan speed may be automatically selected.

OPS043185

1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.

2. Select desired temperature.

4 126

To defrost outside windshield

■

Type A


4. The air-conditioning will be turned on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside

(fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, with a low fan speed, a higher fan speed may be automatically selected.

Defogging logic

To reduce the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions such as or position. To cancel or return to the defogging logic, do the following.

OPS043184

■

Type B

OPS043186

1. Set fan speed to the highest position.

2. Set temperature to the Maximum

(HI).


4 127


Manual climate control system

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it will be reset to the defog logic status.

Automatic climate control system

■

Type A

OPS043189

■

Type B

OPS043187


2. Turn the mode selection knob to the defrost position ( ).

3. Within 10 seconds after select the defrost positon, press the air intake control button ( ) at least

5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake button blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

4 128

OPS043188



CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)

3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button ( ) at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake button blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it will be reset to the defog logic status.

OPS043206

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the clean air function turns on automatically.

Also, the clean air function turns off automatically, when the ignition switch turns to the OFF position.


4 129


STORAGE COMPARTMENT

These compartments can be used to store small items.

• To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.

• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while driving.

Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover cannot close securely.

Center console storage

■

Type A

OPS043060

■

Type B

WARNING

- Flammable materials

Do not store, propane cylinders or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

OPS043061

These compartments can be used to store small items required by the driver or front passenger.

To open the center console storage, pull up the lever. (Type B)

Glove box

OPS043062

To open the glove box, push the button and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after use.

Always keep the glove box closed while the vehicle is in operation.

4 130


Cool box (if equipped)

OPS043064

You can keep beverage cans or other items cool in the glove box.

1. Turn on the air conditioning.

2. Slide the open/close lever of the vent installed in the glove box to the open position.

3. When the cool box is not used, slide the lever to the closed position.

If some items in the cool box block the vent, the cooling effectiveness of the coolbox is reduced.

✽

NOTICE

Do not put perishable food in the cool box because it may not maintain the necessary consistent temperature to keep the food fresh.

✽

NOTICE

If the temperature control knob is in the warm or hot position, warm or hot air will flow into the glove box.

Sunglass holder

OPS043065

To open the sunglass holder, press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses with the lenses facing out.

To close the sunglass holder, push it up.

Do not place other items in the sunglass holder.

4 131


WARNING

- Avoid distracted driving

• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.

• Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder to prevent breakage or deformation of glasses. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.

Luggage box (if equipped)

OPS043198

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy access.

4 132

INTERIOR FEATURES

Cup holder

WARNING

- Hot liquids

Do not place uncovered cups with hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you burn yourself. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle.

Sunvisor


OPS043067

OPS043066

OPS043068

Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.

OVG049174

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows.

To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use the sunvisor for the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (3). (if equipped)

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and slide the mirror cover (4).

To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch it on. (if equipped)

The ticket holder (5, if equipped) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket.

4 133


CAUTION -

Vanity mirror lamp

(if equipped)

If you use the vanity mirror lamp, turn off the lamp before return the sunvisor to its original position. It could result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.

WARNING

For your safety, do not obstruct your vision when using the sunvisor.

Seat warmer (if equipped)

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS033012

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

• Each time you press the switch, the temperature setting of the seat will change as follows :

• Type A

OFF

→

• Type B

OFF

→

HIGH (

LOW ( )

) HIGH (

MIDDLE (

)

)*

OPS033013

The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.

LOW ( )

• The seat warmer defaults to the

OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

• When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer operating, the seat warmer will turn OFF.

✽

NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

4 134


CAUTION

• When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.

Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insulates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers while the seat warmer is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur.

• Be careful not to spill liquid such as water or beverages on the seat. If you spill some liquid, wipe the seat with a dry towel. Before using the seat warmer, dry the seat completely.

WARNING

- Seat warmer burns

Never allow passengers who may not be able to take care of themselves to be exposed to the risk of seat heater burns.

These include:

1.Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients

2.Persons with sensitive skin or those that burn easily

3.Fatigued individuals

4.Intoxicated individuals

5.Individuals taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)

Seat air ventilation (if equipped)

OPS033014

The temperature setting of the seat changes according to the switch position.

• If you want to cool your seat cushion, press the switch (blue color).

• Each time you press the button, the airflow will change as follows:

OFF

→

HIGH (

MIDDLE (

LOW ( )

)

)

4 135


• When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the seat air ventilation operating, the seat air ventilation will turn OFF.

• The seat air ventilation defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

Rear seat warmer (if equipped)

CAUTION

- Seat damage

• When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.

Doing so may damage the air ventilation seat.

• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on the seat. Those things may damage the air ventilation seat.

• Be careful not to spill liquid such as water or beverages on the seat. If you spill some liquid, wipe the seat with a dry towel.

Before using the air ventilation seat, dry the seat completely.

OPS033031

The seat warmer is provided to warm the rear outboard seats during cold weather. With the ignition switch in the ON position, push either of the switches to warm rear seats.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

OFF

→

HIGH ( )

→

LOW ( )

• When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer operating, the seat warmer will turn OFF.

• The seat warmer defaults to the

OFF position whenever the engine start/stop button (the ignition switch) is turned on.

✽

NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

4 136


CAUTION

• When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insulates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers while the seat warmer is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur.

• Be careful not to spill liquid such as water or beverages on the seat. If you spill some liquid, wipe the seat with a dry towel.

Before using the seat warmer, dry the seat completely.

WARNING

- Seat warmer burns

Never allow passengers who may not be able to take care of themselves to be exposed to the risk of seat heater burns.

These include:

1.Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients

2.Persons with sensitive skin or those that burn easily

3.Fatigued individuals

4.Intoxicated individuals

5.Individuals taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)

Power outlet (if equipped)

■

Front (Type A)

■

Rear (if equipped)

OPS043069

OPS043070

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.

4 137


• Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 10A(Driver’s side) or 15A(Passenger’s side) in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle’s power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

WARNING

- Electric shock

Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pin, etc.) into a power outlet and do not touch with a wet hand.You may get an electric shock.

Clothes hanger (if equipped) Floor mat anchor(s)

■

Driver's side

■

Passenger's side

ORP042186

To use the hanger, pull down the upper portion of hanger.

OTFNCO2001

When using a floor mat on the floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.

This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward.

CAUTION

- Hanging clothing

• Do not hang heavy clothes, since those may damage the hook.

• Be careful when opening and closing the doors. Clothes, etc. may get caught between the door gap.

WARNING

- After market floor mat

Do not install aftermarket floor mats that are not capable of being securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

Unsecured floor mats can interfere with pedal operation.

4 138


The following must be observed when installing ANY floormat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floormats are securely attached to the vehicle's floormat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floormat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floormat anchors.

• Do not stack floormats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floormat). Only a single floormat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floormat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floormat in place.

To avoid any interference with pedal operation, Kia recommends that only the Kia floormat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

Luggage net holder

(if equipped)

OPS043193

To keep items from shifting in the cargo area, you can use the holders located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net.

If necessary, contact your authorized

Kia dealer to obtain a luggage net.

To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

- Luggage net

• Always keep your face and body out of the luggage net recoil path and avoid using the luggage net when the straps have visible signs of wear or damage. The luggage net can snap and cause injuries.

• All cargo should be evenly distributed, properly secured and never piled higher than the seatback.

4 139


Cargo area cover (if equipped)

WARNING

- Objects

• Do not place objects on the cargo area cover.

Such objects may be thrown about inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants during an accident or when braking.

• All cargo should be evenly distributed, properly secured and never piled higher than the seatback.

OPS043199

Use the cargo area cover to hide items stored in the cargo area.

OPS043200

To use the cargo area cover, insert the 4 edges into the slots.

CAUTION

- Luggage

Since the cargo area cover may be damaged or malformed, do not apply excessive force to the cover or do not put the heavy loads on it.

4 140


EXTERIOR FEATURES

Mounting bracket for roof carrier

(if equipped)

WARNING

Use a coin or flat blade driver when you remove the roof carrier cover.

If you use your fingernail, it may injure your finger.

OPS043207

To install or remove a roof carrier, you can use the mounting bracket and cover on the roof.

When you install a roof carrier, do the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool (coin or flat blade driver) into the slot and slide the cover toward the arrow on the cover.

OED046091

2. Rotate the cover half way and insert the cover on the roof hole as the illustration.

✽

NOTICE

To prevent losing the roof carrier cover, install the cover on the roof before you install the roof carrier.

3. After using the roof carrier, install the cover back on the roof in the reverse order.

4 141


✽

NOTICE

If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, be sure not to position cargo onto the roof in such a way that it could interfere with sunroof operation.

CAUTION

• When carrying cargo on the roof, take the necessary precautions to make sure the cargo does not damage the roof of the vehicle.

• When carrying large objects on the roof, make sure they do not exceed the overall roof length or width.

WARNING

• The vehicle center of gravity will be higher when items are loaded onto the roof. Avoid sudden starts, braking, sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers or high speeds that may result in loss of vehicle control or rollover resulting in an accident.

• Always drive slowly and turn corners carefully when carrying items on the roof. Severe wind updrafts, caused by passing vehicles or natural causes, can cause sudden upward pressure on items loaded on the roof. This is especially true when carrying large, flat items such as wood panels or mattresses. This could cause the items to fall off the roof and cause damage to your vehicle or others around you.

• To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving, check frequently before or while driving to make sure the items on the roof are securely fastened.

4 142


AUDIO SYSTEM

If you install aftermarket HID head lamps, your vehicle’s audio and electronic devices may malfunction.

Antenna (if equipped)

CAUTION

- Antenna

Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna by rotating it counterclockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.

OHM048154N

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to receive AM or/and FM broadcast signals.

This antenna is removable. To remove the roof antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To install the roof antenna, turn it clockwise.

• When reinstalling your roof antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception.

• When cargo is loaded on the roof rack, do not place the cargo near the antenna pole to ensure proper reception.

4 143


Audio remote control

(if equipped)

OPS043190

The steering wheel audio remote control button may be installed.

Do not operate the audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or that are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

VOLUME (VOL+/ VOL-) (1)

• Push the VOL + to increase volume.

• Push the VOL - to decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for 1 second or more, it will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button.

CDP mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

CDC mode

It will function as the DISC

UP/DOWN button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for less than 1 second, it will work as follows in each mode.

4 144


RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-

TION select buttons.

Aux, USB and iPod

®

(if equipped)

* port

CDP mode

It will function as the TRACK

UP/DOWN button.

CDC mode

It will function as the TRACK

UP/DOWN button.

MODE (3)

Press the button to select Radio or

CD (compact disc).

Detailed information for audio control buttons is described in the following pages in this section.

OPS043194

If your vehicle has an aux and/or

USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod

® port, you can use an aux port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also an iPod

® port to plug in an iPod

®

.

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

* iPod

® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

4 145


Advanced lighting speaker

(if equipped)

OPS043195

OPS043196

The advanced lighting speaker that lights around the front speaker is adjusted by turning the knob as follows.

1. OFF : The light turns off.

2. MUSIC :

The light blinks or changes shade according to the sound of the audio.

If the audio is not turned on, the light does not turn on.

3. MOOD :

The light shade changes automatically at regular interval.

4. +/- :

When the lights are on, push the illumination button to adjust the light intensity.

If low lighting grade is selected, the intensity of light may be weak or may not illuminate according to the audio volume or selected condition.

The lighting around the front speaker may not illuminate when the sound of the audio is low.

Do not use the lights for extended periods when engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

✽

NOTICE

When the doors are opened, the lighting system will not operate.

4 146


How vehicle audio works

FM reception

¢

¢¢

JBM001

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM reception

¢

¢¢

¢

¢¢

JBM002

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance,low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight. In addition, they curve around obstructions resulting in better signal coverage.

4 147


FM radio station

JBM003

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade within short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, and obstructions. This can lead to undesirable or unpleasant listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

JBM004

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

JBM005

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

4 148


Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, try to operate mobile devices as far from the audio equipment as possible.

CAUTION

When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.

WARNING

• Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.

• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.

• Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents.

Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.

• Heed caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunction.

(Continued)

4 149


(Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunction.

Continued use in such conditions could lead to accidents(fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehicle ignition turned on.

Prolonged use with the ignition turned off could result in battery discharge.

CAUTION

• Using the audio system while driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention to external surroundings.

First park the vehicle before operating the device.

• Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle. Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Turn on the car ignition before using the audio system Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off as such operations may lead to battery discharge.

• Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the audio system and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration

(Continued)

4 150

(Continued)

• Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.

• In case of product malfunction, please contact your place of purchase or After Service center.

• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

• Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration.


4 151


USING THE USB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device, make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.

• If you start the engine when the

USB device is connected, it may damage the USB device. (USB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or turned off while the external USB device is connected, the external

USB device may not work.

• The System may not play unauthenticated MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with the compression rate between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps ~

320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.

(Continued)

4 152

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of the external USB device, the connected external USB device can be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector setting of External USB device is not either 512BYTE or

2048BYTE, then the device will not be recognized.

• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F authentication may not be recognizable.

• Make sure the USB connection terminal does not come in contact with the human body or other objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short period of time, it may break the device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• You may hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.

• If you disconnect the external

USB device during playback in

USB mode, the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g, Radio)

• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device, there is a difference in the time for recognition the device.

• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music files.

• Playing videos through the USB is not supported.

• Use of USB accessories such as rechargers or heaters using USB

I/F may lower performance or cause trouble.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If you use devices such as a

USB hub purchased separately, the vehicle’s audio system may not recognize the USB device. In that case, connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/

Cellular phone/Digital camera can be unrecognizable by standard USB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB may not be supported in some mobile devices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable to connection failures due to vehicle vibrations are not supported.

(i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices (METAL COVER TYPE

USB) can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM

(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-

MENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this audio. Always back up important data on a personal storage device.

• Please avoid using

USB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack. Please make certain only to use plug type connector products.


4 153


USING iPod

®

DEVICE

iPod

® is a registered trademark of

Apple Inc.

iPhone

® is a registered grademark of

Apple inc.

• Some iPod

® models may not support communication protocol and files may not properly play.

Supported iPod

® models:

- iPhone

®

3GS/4

- iPod

® touch 1st~4th generation

- iPod

® nano 1st~6th generation

- iPod

® classic

• The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod

® can be different from the order searched in the audio system.

• If the iPod

® is disabled due to its own malfunction, reset the iPod

®

.

(Reset: Refer to iPod

® manual)

• An iPod

® may not operate normally on low battery.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some iPod

® devices, such as the iPhone

®

, can be connected through the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology interface. The device must have audio

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology capability

(such as for stereo headphone

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology ).

The device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.

• To use iPod

® features within the audio, use the cable provided upon purchasing an iPod

® device.

• Skipping or improper operation may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod

®

/iPhone

® device.

• If your iPhone

® is connected to both the Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology and USB, only support iPod

® mode because the sound may not be properly played in

Bluetooth

®

Audio Streaming. To use

Bluetooth

®

Audio Streaming, disconnect iPod

® cable with iPhone

®

.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When connecting iPod

® with the iPod

®

Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket completely. If not inserted completely, communications between iPod

® and audio may be interrupted.

• When adjusting the sound effects of the iPod

® and the audio system, the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod

® when adjusting the audio system’s volume, and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod

®

.

• When not using iPod

® with car audio, detach the iPod

® cable from iPod

®

.

Otherwise, iPod

® may remain in accessory mode, and may not work properly.

4 154


Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology(if equipped)

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death.

The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Before Using the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology

Handsfree

Precautions for Safe Driving

Bluetooth

®


The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license.

A Bluetooth ® enabled call phone is required to use Bluetooth ® wireless technology.

What is Bluetooth ® ?

• Bluetooth

® refers to a short-distance wireless networking technology which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz

frequency to connect various devices within a certain distance.

• Supported within PCs, external devices, Bluetooth

® phones, PDAs, various electronic devices, and automotive environments,

Bluetooth

® allows data to be transmitted at high speeds without having to use a connector cable.

• Bluetooth

®

Handsfree refers to a device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with

Bluetooth

® mobile phones through the audio system.

• Bluetooth

®

Handsfree may not be supported in some mobile phones.

To learn more about mobile device compatibility, visit www.kia.com.

•

Bluetooth

®

Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice safe driving. Connecting the head unit with a Bluetooth

® phone allows the user to conveniently make and receive calls and use contacts.

Before using Bluetooth

®

, carefully read the contents of this user’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents. Refrain from excessive operations while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.

4 155


When connecting a

Phone

Bluetooth

®

• Before connecting the head unit with the mobile phone, check to see that the mobile phone supports Bluetooth

® features.

• Even if the phone supports

Bluetooth

®

, the phone will not be found during device searches if the phone has been set to hidden state or the Bluetooth

® power is turned off. Disable the hidden state or turn on the Bluetooth

® power prior to searching/connecting with the

Head unit.

• If you do not want automatic connection with your Bluetooth

® device, turn off the Bluetooth

® feature within your mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume and quality may differ depending on the mobile phone.

• Park the vehicle when connecting the head unit with the mobile phone.

• Bluetooth

® connection may become intermittently disconnected in some mobile phones. Follow these steps to try again.

1. Within the mobile phone, turn the Bluetooth

® function off/on and try again.

2. Turn the mobile phone power

Off/On and try again.

3. Reboot the audio system and try again.

4. Delete all paired devices, pair and try again.

• Handsfree call quality and volume may differ depending on the model of your mobile phone.

4 156

Voice Recognition

• When using the voice recognition feature, only commands listed within the user's manual are supported.

• Be aware that during the operation of the voice recognition system, pressing any key other than the key terminate voice recognition mode.

• For superior voice recognition performance, position the microphone used for voice recognition above the head of the driver’s seat and maintain a proper position when saying commands.

• Within the following situations, voice recognition may not function properly due to external sound.

- When the windows and sunroof are open

- When the blower AC/heater is set to high through tunnels

(Continued)

(Continued) uneven roads

- During severe rain (heavy rains, windstorms)

• Phone related voice commands can be used only when a

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device is connected.

• When making calls by stating a name, the corresponding contact must be downloaded and stored within the audio system.

• After downloading the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology phone book, it takes some times to convert the phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice recognition may not properly operate.

• Pronounce the voice commands naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.


4 157


AUDIO : AM1A0B2AN, AM1A0B2KN

4 158

PS34001N


SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

AND FUNCTIONS

❈

Display and settings may differ depending on the selected audio.

❈

In Setup>Display, the radio pop up screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned

On

.

When the pop up screen is displayed, use the TUNE knob or

1 desired mode.

6

Audio Head Unit

PS34001N

(1)

RADIO

Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM TM mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟

FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3.

(2)

MEDIA

Changes to USB(iPod

®

), AUX, My

Music, BT Audio mode.

Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of

USB(iPod

®

), AUX, My Music, BT

Audio.

❈

In Setup>Display, the media pop up screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned

On

.

When the pop up screen is displayed, use the TUNE knob or

1 5 desired mode.

(3)

PHONE

Operates Phone Screen

❈

When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is displayed.

(4)

SETUP

CLOCK

Briefly press the key (under 0.8 seconds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,

Clock, Phone, System setting modes

Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) : Move to the Time setting screen

(5)

SEEK

TRACK

Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.

USB, iPod

®

, My Music modes

- Briefly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Moves to next or previous song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

BT Audio mode : Moves to next or previous song(file)

❈

The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

4 159


(6) PWR/VOL knob

Power : Turns power On/Off by pressing the knob

Volume : Sets volume by turning the knob left/right

Radio mode: Saves frequencies

(channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)

USB, iPod

®

, My Music mode

PS34001N

In the Radio, Media, Setup, and

Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected.

(8)

DISP

Each time the button is pressed, it sets the screen Off

➟

Screen On

➟

Screen Off

❈

Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off.

In the screen Off state, press any key to turn the screen On again.

(9)

SCAN

Radio mode

- Shortly press the key : Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset

1

~

6 for 5 seconds each.

❈

Press the

SCAN key again to continue listening to the current frequency.

❈

SAT Radio does not support the

Preset scan feature.

USB, My Music mode

- Briefly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each song

(file) for 10 seconds each.

❈

Press the

SCAN key again to continue listening to the current song (file).

(10)

MENU

Displays menus for the current mode.

❈ iPod List : Move to parent category

4 160

(11)

BACK

Go to previous depth(no previous screen)

(12)

CAT

FOLDER

Radio mode

- SiriusXM TM RADIO : Category

Search

- USB mode : Folder Search

AM/FM mode :

- Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right.

SiriusXM TM

Radio Mode:

- Changes the station by turning the knob left/right. Press knob to select station.

USB, iPod

®

, My Music mode:

- Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.

❈

When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song.

Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.


4 161


SETUP

Display Settings

Press the

SETUP key Select [Display] through TUNE knob or

1 key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes selection mode

On

/

Off

• During On state, press the or

MEDIA

RADIO key to display the mode change pop up screen.

Text Scroll

[Text Scroll] Set

On

/

Off

•

Off

: Scrolls only one (1) time.

Media Display

When playing an MP3 file, select the desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

4 162


SOUND SETTINGS

Press the

SETUP key Select [Sound] through TUNE knob or

2 key


Sound Settings

This menu allows you to set the

‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound

Fader and Balance.

Select [Sound Settings] Select menu through TUNE knob Turn

TUNE knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound tone.

• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader and balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈

Back : While adjusting values, pressing the TUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature will gradually increase the volume as speed increases to offset outside noise.

Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of

TUNE knob

Voice Recognition Volume

Adjusts voice recognition volume.

Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set volume of TUNE knob

4 163


CLOCK SETTINGS

Press the

SETUP

CLOCK key Select [Clock] through TUNE knob or

3 key


Sound Settings

This menu is used to set the time.

Select [Clock Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈

Adjust the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the tune knob to move to the next setting. (Set in order of

Year/Month/Day)

❈

Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the tune knob to set the [minute].

Time Format

This function is used to set the

12/24 hour time format of the audio system.

Select [Time

Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through

TUNE knob

Clock Display when Power is OFF

Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set

On

/

Off through TUNE knob

Calendar Settings

This menu is used to set the date

(MM/DD/YYYY).

Select [Calendar Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

On

Off

: Displays time/date on screen

: Turn off.

4 164


SYSTEM SETTINGS

Memory Information

Press the

SETUP key Select

[System] Select menu through

TUNE knob

Displays currently used memory and total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK

The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side.

• Off : This mode is for expert users and omits some information during voice command operation. (When using Expert mode, guidance instructions can be heard through the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language

This menu is used to set the display and voice recognition language.

Select [Language]

Set through TUNE knob

Prompt Feedback

This feature is used to change voice command feedback between Normal and Expert modes.

Select [Prompt Feedback] Set through TUNE knob

• On : This mode is for beginner users and provides detailed instructions during voice command operation.

❈

The system will reboot after the language is changed.

❈

Language support by region

- English, Francais, Espanol

4 165


RADIO : FM, AM OR SIRIUS

TM

Preset SEEK

Press

1

• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from

1

~

6 will save the currently playing broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SEEK

Press the

SEEK

TRACK key


seconds): Automatically searches for the next station.


0.8 seconds): While holding the key, frequency changes without stopping. When the key is released, automatically searches for the next frequency from that point.

SCAN

Press the

SCAN key


seconds): The broadcast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. After scanning all frequencies, returns and plays the current broadcast frequency.


0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset for 5 seconds each.

1

~

6

Selecting through manual search

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust the frequency.

• FM : Changes by 200KHz

• AM : Changes by 10KHz

4 166

MENU

Within

MENU key are the A.Store

(Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.Store

Press the

MENU key Set [A.Store] through TUNE knob or

1 key.

Saves broadcasts with superior frequencies are received, then the most recently received frequency will be broadcast.


4 167


4

SiriusXM

TM

Satellite Radio information

Satellite Radio channels:

SiriusXM TM Satellite Radio offers

150+ channels with 100% commercial-free music, plus sports, news, talk and entertainment, available nationwide in your vehicle. For more information and a complete list of

SiriusXM TM Satellite Radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United

States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM TM at 1-800-643-2112.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice buildup and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

SiriusXM TM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM TM Satellite Radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM TM Satellite

Radio system include:

• Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

• For a small upgrade fee, access to

SiriusXM TM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the

Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM TM at 1-866-635-2349.

168

NOTE:

All SiriusXM

TM services require a subscription, sold separately or as a package, after 3-month trial included with vehicle purchase or lease. If you decide to continue your SiriusXM

TM service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call us at 1-866-

635-2349 to cancel.

See our

Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com.

Other fees and taxes apply. All fees and programming are subject to change. Sirius satellite service is available only to those at least

18 and older in the 48 contiguous

USA, D.C., and PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in

AK and HI. Certain channels are not available on our Internet radio service or on mobile devices.

© 2013 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius,

XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM

TM

Radio Inc. All rights reserved


SiriusXM TM

RADIO

Using

SiriusXM TM

Satellite

Radio

Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3 month complimentary period of

SiriusXM

TM

Satellite Radio so you have access to over 220 channels of music, information, and entertainment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate your subscription to SiriusXM TM Satellite

Radio, you will need to contact

SiriusXM TM Customer Care at 1-800-

643-2112. Have your 12 digit SID

(Sirius Identification Number) / ESN

(Electronic Serial Number) ready. To retrieve the SID / ESN, turn on the radio, press the [RADIO] button, and tune to channel zero.

Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activation signal.

SEEK

Press the

SEEK

TRACK key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): select previous or next channel.


0.8 seconds): continuously move to previous or next channel.

❈

If the “Category” icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

SCAN

Press the

SCAN key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each broadcast for 10 seconds each

❈

Press the

SCAN key again to continue listening to the current frequency

❈

If the “Category” icon is displayed, channels are changed within the current category.

Category

Press the

CAT

FOLDER through the TUNE knob key Set

• The display will indicate the category menus, highlight the category that the current channel belongs to.

• In the Category List Mode, press the

CAT

FOLDER egory list.

key to navigate cat-

• Press the tune knob to select the lowest channel in the highlighted category.

❈

If channel is selected by selecting category, then the “CATEGORY” icon is displayed at the top of the screen.

4 169


Preset

Press the

RADIO key

1

~

6


seconds): Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.


0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from

1

~

6 will save the current broadcast to the selected key and sound a

BEEP.

✽

Troubleshooting

1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult with your

Kia dealership.

2. Acquiring Signal

If this message is displayed, it means that the antenna is covered and that the SIRIUS

TM

Satellite Radio signal is not available. Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky.

Tune

• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the channel number or scrolls category list.

• Press TUNE knob : Selects the menu.

Menu

Select category menu through the

TUNE knob Press the

MENU key

Select [ Info] through the TUNE knob or

1

RPT key

Info (Information)

Displays the Artist/Song info of the current song.

4 170


BASIC METHOD OF USE :

USB / iPod

®

/ My Music

Press the

MEDIA key to change the mod mode in order of USB(iPod

®

) ➟

AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.

The folder/file name is displayed on the screen.

Repeat

While song (file) is playing

(RPT) key

1

RPT

USB, iPod

®

, My Music mode: RPT on screen

• To repeat one song (press the key)

: Repeats the current song.

USB mode: FLD.RPT on screen

• To repeat folder (pressing twice): repeats all files within the current folder.

❈

Press the off repeat.

1

RPT key again to turn

<USB>

Random


(RDM) key

2

RDM

My Music mode: RDM on screen

• Random (press the key) : Plays all songs in random order.

USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen

• Folder Random (press the key) :

Plays all files within the current folder in random order.

iPod

® mode: ALL RDM on screen

• All Random (press the key) : Plays all files in random order.

USB : ALL RDM on screen

• All Random (pressing twice): Plays all files in random order.

❈

Press the off random.

2

RDM key again to turn

<My Music>

❈

The USB music is automatically played when a USB is connected.

4 171


Changing Song/File


SEEK

TRACK key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the current song from the beginning.

❈

If the

SEEK

TRACK key is pressed again within 2 second, the previous song is played.


0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.


SEEK

TRACK key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the next song.


0.8 seconds) : Fast forwards the song.

Scan

While song (file) is playing key

SCAN

• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all songs from the next song for 10 seconds each.

❈

Press the off.

SCAN key again to turn

❈

The SCAN function is not supported in iPod

® mode.

Folder Search : USB Mode

While file is playing

(Folder Up) key

CAT

FOLDER

• Searches the next folder.

While file is playing

(Folder Down) key

CAT

FOLDER

• Searches the parent folder.

❈

If a folder is selected by pressing the TUNE knob, the first file within the selected folder will be played.

❈

In iPod

® mode, moves to the

Parent Folder.

Searching Songs (File)

• Turning TUNE knob : Searches for songs (files)

• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays selected song (file).

4 172


MENU : USB

Press the USB mode

MENU key to set the Repeat, Folder Random,

Folder Repeat, All Random,

Information, and Copy features.

Folder Random

Press the

MENU key Set [ F.RDM] through the TUNE knob or

2

RDM key to randomly play songs within the current folder.

❈

Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the

MENU key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or

5 key to display information of the current song.

❈

Press the info display.

MENU key to turn off

Repeat

Press the

MENU key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song.

1

RPT

❈

Press RPT again to turn off.

Folder Repeat

Press the

MENU key Set [ F.RPT] through the TUNE knob or

3 key to repeat songs within the current folder.

❈

Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random

Press the

MENU key Set [ A.RDM] through the TUNE knob or

4 key to randomly play all songs within the

USB.

❈

Press A.RDM again to turn off.

4 173


Copy

Press the

MENU

key Set [

Copy] through the TUNE knob

MENU : iPod

®

In iPod

® mode, press the

MENU key to set the Repeat, Random, Information and Search features.

This is used to copy the current song into My Music. You can play the copied Music in My Music mode.

❈

If another key is pressed while copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed.

❈

If another media is connected or inserted (USB, iPod

®

, AUX) while copying is in progress, copying is canceled.

❈

Music will not be played while copying is in progress.

Repeat

Press the

MENU key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or

1

RPT key to repeat the current song.

❈

Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Information

Press the

MENU key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key.

3

Displays information of the current song.

❈



Search

Press the

MENU key Set [ Search] through the TUNE knob or

4 key.

Displays iPod

® category list.

❈

Searching iPod

® category is

MENU key pressed, move to parent category.

Random

Press the

MENU key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or

2

RDM key.

Plays all songs within the currently playing category in random order.

❈

Press RDM again to turn off.

4 174


MENU : My Music Mode

In My Music mode, press the

MENU key to set the Repeat, Random,

Information, Delete, Delete All, and

Delete Selection features.

Information

Press the

MENU key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key.

3

Displays information of the current song.

❈



➀

Select the file you wish to delete by using the TUNE knob.

➁

Press the

MENU key and select the delete menu to delete the selected file.

Delete All

Press the

MENU key Set [ Del.All] through the TUNE knob or

5 key.

Deletes all songs of My Music.

Repeat

Press the

MENU key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or

1

RPT key.

Repeats the currently playing song.

❈

Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Delete

Press the

MENU key Set [ Delete] through the TUNE knob or

4 key.

Deletes currently playing file

In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song.

Deletes file from list

Delete Selection

Press the

MENU key Set [ Del.Sel] through the TUNE knob or key.

6

Songs within My Music are selected and deleted.

➀

Select the songs you wish to delete from the list.

Random

Press the

MENU key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or

2

RDM key.

Plays all songs in random order.

❈

Press RDM again to turn random off.

4 175


➁

After selecting, press

MENU and select the delete menu.

key

AUX

AUX is used to play external MEDIA currently connected with the AUX terminal.

AUX mode will automatically start when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.

If an external device is connected, you can also press the change to AUX mode.

MEDIA key to

My Music

• Even if memory is available, a maximum of 6,000 songs can be stored.

• The same song can be copied up to 1,000 times.

• Memory info can be checked in the

System menu of Setup.

❈

AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.

AUX

Fully insert the AUX cable into the

AUX terminal for use.

4 176


Bluetooth

®


AUDIO (if equipped)

What is Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology?

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology allows devices to be connected in a short distance, including hands-free devices, stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology website at www.Bluetooth.com

• The

Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

A Bluetooth ® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology

Before using

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology audio features

• Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology audio may not be supported depending on the compatibility of your

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology mobile phone.

• In order to use Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology audio, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.

WARNING



•

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology audio can be used only when the

[Audio Streaming] of Phone is

❈

Setting Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Audio Streaming :

Press the

SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming] through the TUNE knob Set

On

/

Off

4 177


Starting

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Audio

• Press the

MEDIA key to change the mode in order of USB

➟

AUX

➟

My Music

➟

BT Audio.

• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology audio will start playing.

❈

Audio may not automatically start playing in some mobile phones.

Using the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology audio features

• Play / Stop

Press the TUNE knob to play and pause the current song.

❈

The title / artist info may not be supported in some mobile phone.

When it is not supported, no title/no artist will be displayed.

• Previous / Next song previous or next song.

❈

The previous song / next song / play / pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones.

4 178


PHONE(IF EQUIPPED)

Making a call using the

Steering-wheel mounted controls

Before using the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology phone features

• In order to use Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology phone, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.

• If the mobile phone is not paired or connected, it is not possible to enter Phone mode. Once a phone is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.

• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology phone connection, set the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology power to OFF

(1)

MODE button : Mode changes each time the button pressed.

(2) VOLUME button : Raises or lowers speaker volume.

(3)

RADIO mode

- Briefly press the key: Move to next or previous preset channel.

- Press and hold the key:

Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.

USB, iPod, My Music Modes

- Briefly press the key: Move to next or previous song.

- Press and hold the key: Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

(4) button : Activates voice recognition.

(5) calls.

button : Places and transfers

(6) button : Ends calls or cancels functions.

4 179


• Check call history and making call

➀

Briefly press (under 0.8 seconds) the key on the steering remote controller.

➁

The call history list will be displayed on the screen.

➂

Press the key again to connect a call to the selected number.

• Redialing the most recently called number

➀

Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the key on the steering remote controller.

➁

The most recently called number is redialed.

Bluetooth

Pairing a

®


Technology Device(if equipped)

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

What is Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology Pairing?

Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology phone or device with the car audio system for connection.

Pairing is necessary to connect and use the Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology feature.

The

Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by



A Bluetooth ® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology

WARNING



4 180


on the Steering Remote

Controller

When No Devices have been

Paired

1.Press the

PHONE key or the key on the steering remote controller.

The following screen is displayed.

2.Select [OK] button to enter the Pair

Phone screen.

[Non SSP supported device]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)

4.After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered. Enter the passkey “0000” to pair your audio system.

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device with the car

1)Car Name : Name of device as shown when searching from your

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology device

2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the device

[SSP supported device]

4.After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey.

Check the passkey on your

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology device and confirm.

3.From your Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device (i.e. Mobile

Phone), search and select your car audio system.

5.Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

4 181


During the pairing process, make sure that all connection requests on the phone are accepted for phonebook download and to allow acceptance of all future connection requests. " and

"Visit http://www.kia.com/us/#/bluetooth for additional information on pairing your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and to view a phone compatibility list.

• If

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the

PHONE key or the key on the steering wheel displays the following screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a new device or select

[Connect] to connect a previously paired device.

4 182


Pairing through [PHONE]

Setup

Press the

SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

1. The following steps are the same as those described in the section

"When No Devices have been

Paired" on the previous page.

•

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported depending on your

Bluetooth

® Wireless

Technology device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls

- Operations during a call (Switch to Private, Switch to call waiting,

MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History

- Downloading Mobile Contacts

-

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device auto connection

- Bluetooth Audio Streaming

• Up to five Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology devices can be paired to the Car Handsfree system.

• Only one Bluetooth

® device can be connected at a time.

• Only one

Bluetooth

® Wireless

Technology device can be connected at a time.

• Other devices cannot be paired while a Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device is connected.

• Only

Bluetooth

® Wireless

Technology Handsfree and

Bluetooth audio related features are supported.

• Bluetooth related operations are possible only within devices that support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio device.

• If a connected

Bluetooth

® Wireless

Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device OFF, or a

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology communication error, corresponding

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology devices are automatically searched and reconnected.

• If the system becomes unstable due to communication errors between the car Handsfree and the

Bluetooth

® Wireless Technology device, reset the device by turning off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology device, the system will be restored.

4 183


• After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent once to the mobile phone. Some mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download request, ensure your mobile phone accepts the connection. Refer to your phones user’s manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device

Press the

SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and select [Connect].

1) Connected Phone : Device that is currently connected

2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

4 184


Changing Priority

What is Priority?

It is possible to pair up to five

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system.

The "Change Priority" feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.

From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the highest priority, then select [Change

Priority] button from the Menu. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority.

• Priority icon will be displayed when the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

Press the

SETUP key Select


4 185


Disconnecting a Device Deleting a Device

Press the

SETUP key Select


Press the

SETUP key Select


• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.

• If a paired Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device is deleted, the device’s call history and contacts data will also be deleted.

• To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and select [Disconnect] button.

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and select

[Delete] button.

4 186


USING

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology(if equipped)

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus

With a Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device connected, press the

PHONE key to display the Phone menu screen.

• If you select the [Call History] button but there is no call history data, a prompt is displayed which asks to download call history data.

• If you select the [Contacts] button but there is no contacts data stored, a prompt is displayed which asks to download contacts data.

• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to your mobile phone user’s manual.

Answering Calls

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.

To accept the call, press key on the steering wheel while the call is incoming.

1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used contacts saved for easy access.

2) Call History : Displays the call history list screen

3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts list screen

4) Setup : Displays Phone related settings.

1) Caller : Displays the other caller's name when the incoming caller is saved within your contacts

2) Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number

4 187


• When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate.

• The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones.

• When a call is answered with the mobile phone, the call mode will automatically revert to Private mode.

Favorites

Press the

[Favorites]

PHONE key Select

Call History

Press the

History]

PHONE key Select [Call

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects call upon selection

2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.

• To save Favorite, contacts should be downloaded.

• Contact saved in Favorites will not be automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone. To update Favorites, delete the Favorite and create a new

Favorite.

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed.

• Call history may not be saved in the call history list in some mobile phones.

• Calls received with hidden caller ID will not be saved in the call history list.

• Calling through the call history is not possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology phone is not connected.

• Up to 20 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call

History.

• Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not stored in Call History.

4 188


Contacts

Press the

[Contacts]

PHONE key Select

The list of saved phone book entries is displayed.

NOTE:

Find a contact in an alphabetical order, press the

MENU

key.

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology phone can be downloaded into the car contacts. Contacts that have been downloaded to the car cannot be edited or deleted on the phone.

• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is maintained even if the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device has been disconnected.

(However, the contacts and call history saved to the phone will be deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)

• It is possible to download contacts during Bluetooth streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, the icon will be displayed within the status bar.

• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact download feature has been turned off within the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device. In addition, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download contacts. If downloading does not normally occur, check the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.

• The contacts download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information of supported

Bluetooth

® devices and function support, refer to your phone’s user manual.

4 189


Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Setting

Pairing a New Device

Press the

SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Viewing Paired Phone List

Press the

SETUP key Select


The Bluetooth

® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by



A

Bluetooth

® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology

WARNING



Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system.

For more information, refer to the

“Pairing through Phone Setup” section within

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology.

This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.

For more information, refer to the

“Setting Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Connection” section within

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology.

4 190


1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :

Connect/ disconnects currently selected phone

2) Change Priority : Sets currently selected phone to highest connection priority

3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone

4) Return : Moves to the previous screen

Downloading Contacts

Press the

SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

• To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone user’s manual.

• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded

As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, a download progress bar is displayed.

• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding data is deleted.

• This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.

• Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

Auto Download (Contacts)

Press the

SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Auto Download]

This feature is used to automatically download mobile contacts entries once a Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology phone is connected.

✽

NOTICE

• The Auto Download feature will download mobile contacts entries every time the phone is connected.

The download time may differ depending on the number of saved contacts entries and the communication state.

• Before downloading contacts, first check to see that your mobile phone supports the contacts download feature.

4 191


Audio Streaming

Press the

SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]

Outgoing Volume

Press the

SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the

SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System

Off]

Once Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology is turned off, Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

When Audio Streaming is turned on, you can play music files saved in your Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device through the audio system.

Use TUNE knob to adjust the outgoing volume level.

• While on a call, the volume can be changed by using the

SEEK

TRACK key.

• To turn Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology back on, go to

[Phone] and select “Yes”.

SETUP

4 192


VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly press the key on the steering wheel. Say a command

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the system will say “Please say a command after the beep (BEEP)”

• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode, then the system will only say “(BEEP)”

• To change Prompt Feedback

[On]/[Off], go to

SETUP

[System]

[Prompt Feedback]

• For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and beep tone.

Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the key on the steering remote controller

The prompt message is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound.

After the “beep”, say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command

Shortly press the key on the steering remote controller

The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep ton will sound. After the “beep”, say the voice command.

4 193


ENDING VOICE

RECOGNITION

While Voice Recognition is operating

Press and hold the key on the steering remote controller

• While using voice command, pressing any steering wheel control or a different key will end voice command.

• When the system is waiting for a voice command, say “cancel” or

“end” to end voice command.

• When the system is waiting for a voice command, press and hold the key on the steering wheel to end voice command.

Voice Recognition and Phone

Contact Tips:

The Kia Voice Recognition System may have difficulty understanding some accents or uncommon names.

When using Voice

Recognition to place a call, speak in a moderate tone, with clear pronunciation

To maximize the use of Voice

Recognition, consider these guidelines when storing contacts:

• Do not store single-name entries

(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead, always use full names (including first and last names) for these contacts

• Do not use special characters

(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)

• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use

"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or acronyms (i.e., use "County

Finance Department" instead of

"C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name exactly as it is entered in the contacts list

• Do not use acronyms (i.e., use

“County Finance Department” instead of “CFD”).

• If a name is not recognized from the contact list, change it to a more descriptive name (e.g., use

“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa

Joe”).

4 194


Illustration on using voice commands

• Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Please say a command after the beep (BEEP) Beep~

More Help

Edit IQS 2nd

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

• Skipping Prompt Messages

Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Please say a...

while guidance message is being stated

Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)

(BEEP)

More Help

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

• End voice command.

Briefly pressing the

(BEEP) key (under 0.8 seconds):

Contacts

Contacts.

Please say the name of the contact you want to call.

Beep Beep.. (end beep)

Cancel

4 195


Voice Command List

• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)

Command

More Help

Help

Call<Name>

Phone

Function

Provides guidance on commands that can be used anywhere in the system.

Provides guidance on commands that can be used within the current mode.

Calls <Name> saved in Contacts

Ex) Call “John Smith”

Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say

“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial

Number” execute corresponding functions.

Display the Favorite screen.

Favorites

Call History

Contacts

Dial Number

Displays the Call History screen.

Displays the Contacts screen. After saying this command, say the name of a contact saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.

Display the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call.

Redial Connects the most recently called number.

Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice recognition and Bluetooth

® connections

Command

Radio

Function

•

When listening to the radio, displays the next radio screen. (FM1

➟

FM2

➟

AM

➟

SAT1

➟

SAT2

➟

SAT3

➟

FM1)

•

When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played radio screen.

•

When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played FM screen.

FM1(FM One)

FM2(FM Two)

Displays the FM1 screen.

Displays the FM2 screen.

AM Displays the AM screen.

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in FM Preset 1~6.

AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.

FM 87.5~107.9

Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.

AM 530~1710

SiriusXM

TM

(Satellite)

Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.

•

When currently listening to the SiriusXM

TM

, maintains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played SiriusXM

TM screen.

4 196


Command Function

SiriusXM

TM

(Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXM

TM

1~3 screen.

SiriusXM

TM

0~223 the selected SiriusXM

TM channel.

Media

USB iPod

®

Moves to the most recently played media screen.

Plays USB music.

Plays iPod

® music.

Command

My Music

Function

Plays the music saved in My Music.

AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.

Bluetooth ® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth ® device.

Please repeat

Mute

Cancel (Exit)

Repeats the most recent comment.

Mutes the sound.

Ends voice command.

4 197


• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during

FM, AM radio operation.

Command

Preset 1~6

Scan

Preset Scan

Information

Function

Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.

Scans receivable frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Moves to the next preset from the current present and plays for 10 seconds each.

Displays the information of the current broadcast.(This feature can be used when receiving

RBDS broadcasts.)

• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function

Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.

Scan

Preset 1~6

Information

Scans receivable channels from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Displays the information of the current broadcast.

4 198


• USB commands: Commands available during USB operation.

Command

Random

Random Off

Repeat

Repeat Off

Function

Randomly plays the files within the current folder.

Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.

Repeats the current file.

Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.

Information Displays the information screen of the current file.

Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder.

Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder.

• iPod

®

Commands: Commands available during iPod

® operation.

Command

Random

Random Off

Repeat

Repeat Off

Function

Randomly plays the songs within the current category.

Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.

Repeats the current song.

Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

4 199


• My Music Commands: Commands available during

My Music operation.

Command

Random

Random Off

Repeat

Repeat Off

Delete

Function

Randomly plays all saved files.

Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.

Repeats the current file.

Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.

Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.

•

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology Audio Commands:

Commands available during Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation.

Command

Play

Pause

Function

Plays the currently paused song.

Pauses the current song.

4 200

SiriusXM™ service requires a subscription, sold separately, after 3-month trial included with vehicle purchase.

If you decide to continue your

SiriusXM™ service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call us at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel.

See our Customer

Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. Other fees and taxes apply. All fees and programming are subject to change.

Sirius satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C., and PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI. Certain channels are not available on our Internet radio service or on mobile devices. SiriusXM Traffic available in select markets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for more information. © 2013 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius

XM Radio Inc. iPod ® is a registered trademark of

Apple Inc. iPod ® mobile digital device sold separately. The

Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and any use of such marks by Kia is under license.

A Bluetooth ® enabled cell phone is required to use

Bluetooth ® wireless technology.

All rights reserved.


4 201

Driving your vehicle

Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

• Illuminated engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

• Engine start/stop button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

• Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

• Parking brake - Hand type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

• Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

• To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . . 5-43

• To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following. . . 5-44

Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

• Active ECO operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

• When Active ECO is activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

• Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

• Auto stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

• Auto start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

• Condition of ISG system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

• ISG system deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

• ISG system malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

5

5

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

• Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-62

• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-63

• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Driving your vehicle

WARNING

- ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.

Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.

If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

5 3


CALIFORNIA PROPO-

SITION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

BEFORE DRIVING

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.

• Check the condition of the tires.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, at the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in chapter 7,

“Maintenance”.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control, that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

5 4


Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.

• Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

• Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING

All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer to “Seat belts” in chapter 3 for more information on their proper use.

WARNING

Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before putting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING

- Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous. Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs, don’t drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Choose a designated driver or call a cab.

5 5


WARNING

• When you intend to park or stop the vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and ignite a fire.

• When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering wheel rapidly, loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Keep all things in the vehicle safely stored.

• If you do not focus on driving, it may cause an accident. Be careful when operating what may disturb driving such as audio or heater. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive safely.

5 6

KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)

Illuminated ignition switch Ignition switch position

LOCK


✽

NOTICE

If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension.

OPS053001

Whenever a front door is opened, the ignition switch will illuminate for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is not in the ON position. The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on. It will also go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

OXM059029N

The steering wheel locks to protect against theft (if equipped). The ignition key can be removed only in the

LOCK position.

When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.

5 7


ON

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge.

START

Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning light can be checked in this position.

WARNING

- Ignition switch

• Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is moving. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

• The anti-theft steering column lock (if equipped) is not a substitute for the parking brake.

Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in 1st gear for the manual transaxle or P (Park) for automatic transaxle, set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never reach for the ignition switch, or any other controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.

The presence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control, an accident and serious bodily injury or death.

• Do not place any movable objects around the driver’s seat as they may move while driving, interfere with the driver and lead to an accident.

5 8


Starting the engine

WARNING

Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots,etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal.

1.Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2.Manual Transaxle - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal depressed while turning the ignition switch to the start position.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

3.Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.

4.In extremely cold weather (below

0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days, let the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without

depressing the accelerator.

CAUTION

If the engine stalls while you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION

Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before reengaging the starter. Improper use of the starter may damage it.

5 9


ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

Illuminated ENGINE

START/STOP button

ENGINE START/STOP button position

OFF

Not illuminated

• With manual transaxle

To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position), stop the vehicle then press the engine start/stop button.

OPS053003

Whenever the front door is opened, the ENGINE START/STOP button will illuminate for your convenience.

The light will go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

When all entrances are closed, if you lock the vehicle by using the transmitter or the smart key, the light will go off immediately.

• With automatic transaxle

To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position), press the ENGINE

START/STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. When you press the ENGINE

START/STOP button without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the

ENGINE START/STOP button will not change to the OFF position but to the ACC position.

CAUTION

You are able to turn off the engine (START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON), only when the vehicle is not in motion. In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the engine off and to the

ACC position by pressing the

ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3 seconds.

If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the ENGINE

START/STOP button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

5 10

START/RUN


ACC(Accessory) ON

Amber


Press the engine start/stop button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the clutch pedal.

Redish orange


Press the engine start/stop button when the button is in the ACC position without depressing the clutch pedal.

Not illuminated


To start the engine, depress the clutch pedal and brake pedal, then press the engine start/stop button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.


Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while it is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.

If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position for more than

1 hour, the button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge.


Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. Do not leave the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ON position for a long time. The battery may discharge, because the engine is not running.


To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE

START/ STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) or the N

(Neutral) position. For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

5 11


✽

NOTICE

If you press the ENGINE

START/STOP button without depressing the clutch pedal for manual transaxle vehicles or without depressing the brake pedal for automatic transaxle vehicles, the engine will not start and the ENGINE

START/STOP button changes as follow:

OFF

➔ ACC ➔

✽

NOTICE

If you leave the ENGINE START/

STOP button in the ACC or ON position for a long time, the battery will discharge.

WARNING

• Never press the ENGINE

START/STOP button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is in motion, this would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

• Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in P

(Park), set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never reach for the ENGINE

START/STOP button or any other controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in the area could cause loss of vehicle control, an accident and serious bodily injury or death.

• Do not place any movable objects around the driver's seat as they may move while driving, interfere with the driver and lead to an accident.

5 12


Starting the engine with a smart key (if equipped)

1.Carry the smart key or leave it inside the vehicle.

2.Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied

3.Manual Transaxle - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal depressed while starting the engine.

Automatic transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while depressing the brake pedal.

5.In extremely cold weather (below

(-18°C) 0°F) or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days, let the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without depressing the accelerator.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from you, the engine may not start.

• When the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position or above, if any door is opened, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, a message "key is not in the vehicle" will appear on the LCD display.

And if all doors are closed, the chime will sound for 5 seconds.

The indicator or warning will turn off while the vehicle is moving.

Always have the smart key with you.

WARNING

The engine will start, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.

Never allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the ENGINE

START/STOP button or related parts.

CAUTION

If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If the traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and press the ENGINE START/STOP button in an attempt to restart the engine.

5 13


OPS053007

✽

NOTICE

• If the battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button with the smart key.

The side with the lock button should contact the engine start/stop button directly.

When you press the engine start/stop button directly with the smart key, the smart key should contact the button at a right angle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If it is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the

ENGINE START/STOP button for 10 seconds while it is in the

ACC position. The engine can start without depressing the brake pedal. But for your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the engine.

CAUTION

Do not press the ENGINE

START/ STOP button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown.

5 14


MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Manual transaxle operation

The shift lever can be moved without pushing the ring (1).

The ring (1) must be pushed while moving the shift lever.

OJD053058

• The manual transaxle has 6 forward gears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.

• Press the clutch pedal down fully while shifting, then release it slowly.

If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock switch, the engine will not start when starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal. (if equipped)

• The gearshift lever must be returned to the neutral position before shifting into R (Reverse).

The ring (1) located immediately below the shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position. (if equipped)

•

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R

(Reverse).

Never operate the engine with the tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

CAUTION

• When downshifting from fifth gear to fourth gear, caution should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear shift lever sideways in such a manner that second gear is engaged.

Such a drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red-zone. Such over-revving of the engine may possibly cause engine damage.

• Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may damage the engine.

5 15


• During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.

• If you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st or R

(Reverse), put the shift lever in N

(Neutral) position and release the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st or R

(Reverse) gear position.

CAUTION

• To avoid premature clutch wear and damage, do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch to hold the vehicle stopped on an uphill grade, while waiting for a traffic light, etc.

• Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

WARNING

• Before leaving the driver’s seat, always set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Then make sure the transaxle is shifted into

1st gear when the vehicle is parked on a level or uphill grade, and shifted into R

(Reverse) on a downhill grade. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.

• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle not equipped with a ignition lock switch, it may move and cause a serious accident when starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal while the parking brake is released and the shift lever not in the N

(neutral) position.

Using the clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. The clutch pedal should always be fully released while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

CAUTION

When operating the clutch pedal, depress the clutch pedal down fully. If you don’t depress the clutch pedal fully, the clutch may be damaged or noise may occur.

5 16


Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives better acceleration when you again need to increase your speed. When the vehicle is traveling down steep hills, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This is extremely hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in gear.

• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into reverse. The transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To shift into reverse, depress the clutch, move the shift lever to neutral, then shift to the reverse position.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.

5 17


WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed limits.

5 18

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

+

((

(( U P ))

))

--

--

((

(( D O

W

N

))

))


Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.

✽

NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM

(Transaxle Control Module) or

PCM (Powertrain Control Module).

Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.

(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.

However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle.)

Press the lock release button when shifting.

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

OPS053008

5 19


For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.

WARNING

- Automatic transaxle

• Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting the shift lever into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to your transaxle, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on.

• When stopped on an incline, do not hold the vehicle with the engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R

(Reverse) when the engine is above idle speed.

Transaxle ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). This position locks the transaxle and prevents the drive wheels from rotating.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always make sure the shift lever is latched in the P

(Park) position and set the parking brake fully.

• Never leave a child unattended in a vehicle.

5 20


CAUTION

The transaxle may be damaged if you shift into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving position. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the transaxle if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion, except when “Rocking the vehicle” explained in this section.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades, depress the accelerator fully, at which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower gear.

✽

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into D (Drive).

+ (( (( U P )) ))

--

-((

((

D O W

N ))

))

Sports mode

OPS053009

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D

(Drive) position into the manual gate.

To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.

In contrast to a manual transaxle, the sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

5 21


Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

✽

NOTICE

• In sports mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.

• In sports mode, only the 6 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P

(Park) position as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.

• In sports mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone shift points are varied to upshift automatically.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.

• When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the +(up) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st gear.

Shift lock system

For your safety, the automatic transaxle has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transaxle from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R (Reverse):

1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2.Start the engine or turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

3.Move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released with the shift lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering noise near the shift lever may be heard. It is a normal condition.

5 22


WARNING

Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle which could injure persons in or around the vehicle.

OPS053010

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into R

(Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following:

1.Carefully remove the cap covering the shift-lock access hole (1).

2.Insert a screwdriver into the access hole and press down on the screwdriver.

3.Move the shift lever.

4.Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer immediately.

Ignition key interlock system

The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position. Even if the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the key also cannot be removed.

If your vehicle is equipped with

ENGINE START/STOP button, the button will not change to the OFF position unless the shift lever is in the

P (Park) position.

5 23


Good driving practices

• Never move the gear shift lever from P (Park) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.

• Never move the gear shift lever into

P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed limits.

5 24

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle.

During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.

Moving up a steep grade from a standing start

To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to D

(Drive). Select the appropriate gear depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the service brakes.

When accelerating from a stop on a steep hill, the vehicle may have a tendency to roll backwards.

Shifting the shift lever into 2

(Second Gear) will help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards.


5 25


BRAKE SYSTEM

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

In the event that the power-assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason, you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

- Brakes

• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal.

This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

• When descending a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Continuous brake application will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, apply them lightly while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal.

• Always, confirm the position of the brake and accelerator pedal before driving. If you don’t check the position of the accelerator and brake pedal before driving, you may depress the accelerator instead of the brake pedal. It may cause a serious accident.

5 26


In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater than normal.

WARNING

- Parking brake

Applying the parking brake while the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.

Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

CAUTION

• To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

• Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs.

WARNING

Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the vehicle system and endanger driving safety.

WARNING

- Brake wear

This brake wear warning sound means your vehicle needs service. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a serious accident.

5 27


Parking brake - Hand type

Applying the parking brake

CAUTION

Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

Releasing the parking brake

OPS053011

To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then without pressing the release button in, pull the parking brake lever up as far as possible.

In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear on manual transaxle vehicles or in the P

(Park) position for automatic transaxle vehicles.

5 28

OPS053012

To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Secondly press the release button (1) and lower the parking brake lever (2) while holding the button.


WARNING

• To prevent unintentional movement when stopped and leaving the vehicle, do not use the shift lever instead of the parking brake. Set the parking brake AND make sure the shift lever is securely positioned in

1st (First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual transaxle equipped vehicles and in P

(Park) for automatic transaxle equipped vehicles.

• Never allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

W-75

Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the

START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.

5 29


Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

WARNING

ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers.

Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for vehicles equipped with an anti-lock braking system (or Electronic

Stability Control System) may be longer than for those without it in the following road conditions.

(Continued)

(Continued)

During these conditions the vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

• On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS

(or ESC) equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situation allows the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes.

5 30


✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.

The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

W-78

CAUTION

• If the ABS warning light is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. In this case, however, your regular brakes will work normally.

• The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the

ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS.

Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

• When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and have operated your brakes continuously, the

ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and stop the engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light goes off, then your ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS.

Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

5 31


✽

NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time. This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS has malfunctioned.

• Do not pump your brakes!

• Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

Electronic stability control

(ESC)

OPS053013

The Electronic Stability control

(ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the brakes on individual wheels and intervenes with the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.

WARNING

Never drive too fast according to the road conditions or too quickly when cornering.

Electronic stability control

(ESC) will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose traction.

Even with ESC installed, always follow all the normal precautions for driving - including driving at safe speeds for the conditions.

5 32


The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the Electronic

Stability Control System is functioning properly.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

-

• When the ignition is turned

ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately 3 seconds, then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off.

(ESC OFF indicator will illuminate). To turn the

ESC on, press the ESC

OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light will go off).

• When starting the engine, you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light blinks.

Stability Control is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mud or driving on a slippery road, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine rpm

(revolutions per minute) to increase.

5 33


ESC operation off

ESC OFF state

This car has 2 kinds of ESC off states.

If the engine stops when

ESC is off, ESC remains off.

Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

OPS053022

• ESC off state 1

To cancel ESC operation, press the

ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC OFF indicator light

(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this state, the engine control function does not operate. It means the traction control function does not operate. Brake control function only operates.

If your vehicle is equipped with cluster type B, a message also will appear on the LCD display.

OPS053023

• ESC off state 2

To cancel ESC operation, press the

ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates and ESC OFF warning chime will sound. At this state, the engine control function and brake control function do not operate. It means the car stability control function does not operate any more.

If your vehicle is equipped with cluster type B, a message also will appear on the LCD display.

5 34


Indicator light

■

ESC indicator light

■

ESC OFF indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to ON, the indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates when ESC fails to operate.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

CAUTION

Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your original tires.

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• ESC should be turned on for daily driving whenever possible.

• To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Control system is only a driving aid; use precautions for safe driving by slowing down on curved, snowy, or icy roads. Drive slowly and don’t attempt to accelerate whenever the ESC indicator light is blinking, or when the road surface is slippery.

WARNING

Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).

If ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control.

5 35


✽

NOTICE

• When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, ensure that the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated). If the ESC is left on, it may prevent the vehicle speed from increasing, and result in false diagnosis.

• Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or brake system operation.

Vehicle stability management

(VSM)

This system provides further enhancements to vehicle stability and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a vehicle detects changes in coefficient of friction between right wheels and left wheels when braking.

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on bank road such as gradient or incline

• Driving in reverse

• ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains on the instrument cluster

• EPS indicator light remains on the instrument cluster

VSM operation

When the VSM is in operation, ESC indicator light ( ) blinks.

When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle and/or abnormal steering responses

(EPS). This is only the effect of brake and EPS control and indicates nothing unusual.

VSM operation off

If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illuminates.

To turn on the VSM, press the button again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes out.

5 36


Malfunction indicator

The VSM can be deactivated even if you don’t cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that a malfunction has been detected somewhere in the

Electric Power Steering system or

VSM system. If the ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning light remains on, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

✽

NOTICE

• The VSM is designed to function above approximately 13 mph (22 km/h) on curves.

• The VSM is designed to function above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when a vehicle is braking on a split-mu road. The split-mu road is made of surfaces which have different friction forces.

WARNING

• The Vehicle Stability

Management system is not a substitute for safe driving practices but a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. Always hold the steering wheel firmly while driving.

• Your vehicle is designed to activate according to the driver’s intention, even with installed VSM. Always follow all the normal precautions for driving at safe speeds for the conditions – including driving in clement weather and on a slippery road.

• Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the

VSM system to malfunction.

When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your original tires.

Hill-start assist control (HAC)

A vehicle has the tendency to roll back on a steep hill when it starts to go after stopping. The Hill-start

Assist Control (HAC) prevents the vehicle from rolling back by applying the brakes automatically for about 2 seconds. The brakes are released when the accelerator pedal is depressed or after about 2 seconds.

WARNING

The HAC is activated only for about 2 seconds, so when the vehicle is starting off always depress the accelerator pedal.

5 37


✽

NOTICE

• The HAC does not operate when the transaxle shift lever is in the P

(Park) or N (Neutral) position.

• The HAC activates even though the ESC is off but it does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.

Good braking practices

WARNING

• Whenever you leave or park your vehicle, always set the parking brake as far as possible and shift the vehicle to 1st

(First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual transaxle, or P (Park) for automatic transaxle. If the parking brake is not fully engaged, the vehicle may move inadvertently and injure yourself and others.

• All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

• Check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away.

• Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the vehicle is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

5 38


• Don't coast down hills with the vehicle out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because the brakes might overheat and lose their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake components.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle, don't let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

• Be cautious when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear

(manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

5 39


CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Cruise indicator

2. Cruise set indicator

OPS053015

The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without pressing the accelerator pedal.

This system is designed to function above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

WARNING

• If the cruise control is left on

(CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminated), the cruise control can be switched on accidentally.

Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) when the cruise control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

• Do not use the cruise control when it may not be safe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed, for instance, driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snowcovered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.

• Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the cruise control system.

(Continued)

5 40

(Continued)

• Be careful when driving downhill using the cruise control system, which may increase the vehicle speed.

CAUTION

During cruise-speed driving of a manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, since the engine will be overrevved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or release the cruise control ON-OFF switch.


✽

NOTICE

• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. The delay is normal.

• To activate cruise control, depress the brake pedal at least once after turning the ignition switch to the

ON position or starting the engine.

This is to check if the brake switch which is important part to cancel cruise control is in normal condition.

Cruise control switch

OPS053016

CRUISE : Turns cruise control system on or off.

CANCEL: Cancels cruise control operation.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.

To set cruise control speed:

OPS053017

1. Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

✽

NOTICE

- Manual transaxle

For manual transaxle vehicles, you should depress the brake pedal at least once to set the cruise control after starting the engine.

5 41


To increase cruise control set speed:

To decrease the cruising speed:

OPS053018

3. Push the SET - switch, and release it at the desired speed.

The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

Release the accelerator pedal at the same time. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill.

OPS053019

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the RES + switch and hold it.

Your vehicle will accelerate.

Release the lever at the speed you want.

• Push the RES + switch and release it immediately.

The cruising speed will increase by

1 mph (or 2km/h) each time you move the lever up (to RES+) in this manner.

OPS053018

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the SET - switch and hold it.

Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the lever at the speed you want to maintain.

• Push the SET - switch and release it immediately.

The cruising speed will decrease by 1 mph (2 km/h) each time you move the lever down (to SET-) in this manner.

5 42


To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal.

Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator.

To cancel cruise control, do one of the following:

Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, push the

RES + switch located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed.

OPS053020

• Press the brake pedal.

• Depress the clutch pedal if equipped with a manual transaxle.

• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic transaxle.

• Push the CANCEL switch located on the steering wheel.

• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the memory speed by approximately 12mph(20km/h).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).

5 43


To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h):

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following:

OPS053019

If any method other than the

CRUISE button was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when the

RES + switch is pushed.

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

OPS053017

• Press the CRUISE button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions cancel cruise control operation. If you want to resume cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in “To set cruise control speed” on the previous page.

5 44


ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Active ECO operation

• When the Active ECO is activated, it will remain on until the Active

ECO button is pressed again.

Active ECO does not turn off when the engine is restarted. To turn off

Active ECO, press the Active ECO button again.

• If Active ECO is turned off, the system will return to normal mode.

OPS053030

Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency by controlling certain engine and transaxle system operating parameters. Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's driving habit and road condition.

• When the Active ECO button is pressed the ECO indicator (green) will illuminate to show that the

Active ECO is operating.

When Active ECO is activated:

• The acceleration may slightly be reduced eventhough you depress the accelerator fully.

• The air conditioner performance may be limited.

• The shift pattern of the automatic transaxle may change.

• The engine noise may get louder.

The above situations are normal conditions when the active eco system is activated to improve fuel efficiency.

Limitation of Active ECO operation:

If the following conditions occur while

Active ECO is operating, the system operation is limited even though there is no change in the ECO indicator.

• When the coolant temperature is low: The system will be limited until engine performance becomes normal.

• When driving up a hill: The system will be limited to gain power when driving uphill because the engine torque is restricted.

• When using sports mode: The system will be limited according to the shift location.

• When the accelerator pedal is deeply depressed for a few seconds: The system will be limited, judging that the driver wants to speed up.

5 45


ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ISG system, which reduces fuel consumption by automatically shutting down the engine, when the vehicle is at a standstill. (For example : red light, stop sign and traffic jam)

The engine starts automatically as soon as the starting conditions are met.

The ISG system is ON whenever the engine is running.

Auto stop

To stop the engine in idle stop mode

■

Type A

✽

NOTICE

When the engine automatically starts by the ISG system, some warning lights (ABS, ESC, ESC

OFF, EPS or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds.

This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean the system is malfunctioning.

■

Type B

OPS053028

You must reach a speed of at least

5 mph (8 km/h) since last idle stop.

The engine will stop and the green

AUTO STOP indicator ( ) on the instrument cluster will illuminate.

OPS053029

Stop the vehicle completely by pressing the brake pedal.

5 46

OTF054124

If your vehicle is equipped with cluster type B, a message "Auto Stop" also will appear on the LCD display.

OPS053024

If you open the engine hood in auto stop mode, the ISG system will deactivate (the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate). A message "Auto

Stop Deactivated Start Manually" will appear on the LCD display. (if equipped)

Turn the engine on manually.


OPS053014

Auto start

To restart the engine from idle stop mode

• Release the brake pedal.

or

• Move the shift gear to the R

(Reverse) position or the sports mode while depressing the brake pedal.

The engine will start and the green

AUTO STOP indicator ( ) on the instrument cluster will go out.

5 47


The engine will also restart automatically without the driver’s any actions if the following occurs:

- When a certain amount of time has passed with the climate control system on.

- When the front defroster is on.

- The brake vaccum pressure is low.

- The battery charging status is low.

- The vehicle speed exceeds 1 MPH

(1 km/h).

- The fan speed is in the highest position when the air conditioning is on.

- Engine is turned off by Auto Stop for a long time.

- If you unfasten the seat belt or open the driver's door while depressing the brake pedal.

OPS053025

The green AUTO STOP indicator

( ) on the instrument cluster will blink for 5 seconds and a message

“Auto Start” will appear on the LCD display (if equipped).

Condition of ISG system operation

The ISG system will operate under the following condition:

- The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

- The driver’s door and engine hood are closed.

- The brake vaccum pressure is adequate.

- The battery is sufficiently charged.

- The outside temperature is more than 28.4°F (-2°C).

- The outside temperature is under

89.6°F (32°C).

- The engine coolant temperature is not low.

5 48

ISG system deactivation


• If you press the ISG OFF button again, the system will be activated and the light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.

OPS053026

• If the ISG system does not meet the operation condition, the ISG system is deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and a message “Auto Stop

Conditions not met” will appear on the LCD display (if equipped).

• If the light or notice comes on continuously, please check the operation condition.

OPS053014

OPS053027

• If you want to deactivate the ISG system, press the ISG OFF button.

The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and a message “Auto

Stop off” will appear on the LCD display (if equipped).

5 49


ISG system malfunction

The system may not operate when:

OPS053014

- If the ISG related sensors or system error occurs, the yellow AUTO

STOP indicator ( ) on the instrument cluster will stay on after blinking for 5 seconds and the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate.

• If the ISG OFF button light is not turned off by pressing the ISG OFF button again or if the ISG system continuously does not work correctly, please contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

- Engine repair

Turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK (OFF) position or remove the key from the ignition completely before performing work on the vehicle in the engine area. Failure to do so could result in serious injuries due to sudden engine reactivation.

✽

NOTICE

If the AGM battery is reconnected or replaced, ISG function will not operate immediately.

If you want to use the ISG function, the battery sensor needs to be calibrated for approximately 4 hours with the ignition off and then, turn the engine on and off 2 or 3 times.

5 50


ECONOMICAL OPERATION

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jackrabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to the traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily.

Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking.

This also reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.

• Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. If you drive your vehicle in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see section 7 for details).

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the vehicle. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces fuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting

(and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.

5 51


• Remember, your vehicle does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear.

In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warmup period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.

Lugging is driving too slowly in a very high gear resulting in engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit.

This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speed.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.

The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia dealer perform scheduled inspections and maintenance.

WARNING

- Engine off during motion

Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function properly without the engine running. Instead, keep the engine on and downshift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect. In addition, turning off the ignition while driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss of vehicle steering which could cause serious injury or death.

5 52


SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.

• Avoid sudden braking or steering.

• When braking with non-ABS brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle is stopped.

WARNING

- ABS

Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, or other nonslip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING

- Downshifting

Downshifting with an automatic transaxle, while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.

Reducing the risk of a rollover

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Crossover Utility

Vehicle (CUV). CUV’s have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, which allows you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger vehicles, any more than low-slung sports vehicles are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.

If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, do not load your roof rack with heavy cargo, and never modify your vehicle in any way.

5 53


WARNING

- Rollover

As with other Crossover Utility

Vehicle (CUV), failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.

• Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

• Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, narrower track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles.

• A CUV is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional vehicles.

• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

• In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make sure everyone in the vehicle is properly buckled up.

WARNING

Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to steering failure or rollover and serious injury.

When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Kia for off road driving, you should not use these tires for highway driving.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between 1st (First) and R

(Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle. Do not race the engine, and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle.

CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may cause engine overheating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.

5 54


WARNING

- Spinning tires

Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 35 mph (56 km/h). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat which could result in tire damage that may injure bystanders.

✽

NOTICE

The ESC system should be turned

OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle.

During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.

Smooth cornering

OUN056051

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.

5 55


Driving at night

OCM053010

Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed. (On vehicles not equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature.) Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

1VQA3003

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if you’re not prepared for the slick pavement.

Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.

• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

5 56


• If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tires are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Driving off-road

Drive carefully off-road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving.

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure.

✽

NOTICE

Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.

WARNING

• Underinflated or overinflated tires can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. Always check tires for proper inflation before driving. For proper tire pressures, refer to “Tires and wheels” in section 8.

• Driving on tires with no or insufficient tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can result in loss of vehicle control, collisions, injury, and even death.

Worn-out tires should be replaced as soon as possible and should never be used for driving. Always check the tire tread before driving your vehicle. For further information and tread limits, refer to “Tires and wheels” in section 7.

5 57


Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both the engine coolant and engine oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine.

5 58


WINTER DRIVING

1VQA3005

Severe weather conditions in the winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter driving, you should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires.

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in front of your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

✽

NOTICE

Tire chains are not legal in all states.

Check state laws before fitting tire chains.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle’s handling in all weather conditions.

Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

WARNING

- Snow tire size

Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.

5 59


Tire chains

1VQA3007

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of snow chains. Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; snow chains may cause damage to the wheels. If snow chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than

0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehicle caused by improper snow chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.

When using tire chains, install them on the front tires only.

CAUTION

• Make sure the snow chains are the correct size and type for your tires. Incorrect snow chains can cause damage to the vehicle body and suspension and may not be covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty. Also, the snow chain connecting hooks may be damaged from contacting vehicle components causing the snow chains to come loose from the tire. Make sure the snow chains are SAE class “S” certified.

• Always check chain installation for proper mounting after driving approximately 0.3 to

0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.

Retighten or remount the chains if they are loose.

5 60


Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly as you can.

Drive slowly with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until it stops. Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

WARNING

- Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning flashers and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle if available. Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains.

WARNING

- Tire chains

• The use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or lockedwheel braking.

CAUTION

• Chains that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.

• Stop driving and retighten the chains any time you hear them hitting the vehicle.

5 61


Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized Kia dealer or a service station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See section 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized

Kia dealer.

Check spark plugs and ignition system

Inspect your spark plugs as described in section 7 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an authorized Kia dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish.

5 62


Don’t let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.

If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear shift lever in P

(Park, automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.

TRAILER TOWING

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the vehicle to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components are not obstructed.

5 63


VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

Tire and loading information label

OPS053100N/OPS053104N/OPS053102N/OPS053101N/OPS053103N/OPS053105N

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

5 64


Vehicle capacity weight:

827 lbs. (375 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:

Total - 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

5 65


Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load, if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1.Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.

2.Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3.Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4.The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs.

and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5.Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6.If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

5 66

Example 3


Example 1 Example 2

A B C A B C A B C

C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM

Item

A

B

C

Description Total

Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs

Weight

Subtract Occupant

(635 kg)

Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

300 lbs

(136 kg)

Available Cargo and 1100 lbs

Luggage weight (499 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description Total


Weight

Subtract Occupant

(635 kg)

Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) × 5

750 lbs

(340 kg)



Item

A

B

C

Description Total


Weight

Subtract Occupant

(635 kg)

Weight

172 lbs (78 kg) × 5

860 lbs

(390 kg)



Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight.

5 67


Certification label

OEN056020

The certification label is located on the driver's door sill at the center pillar.

This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The

GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

WARNING

- Over loading

• Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (or people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR, either the maximum front or rear

GAWR and vehicle capacity weight.

If you do, parts, including tires on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles and braking ability. This could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle

- like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

5 68


WARNING

• Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure that could lead to a crash.

• Overloading your vehicle can cause increased stopping distances that could lead to a crash.

• A crash resulting from poor handling vehicle damage, tire failure, or increased stopping distances could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

• Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

WARNING

- Loose cargo

Items you carry inside your vehicle can strike and injure occupants in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

• Put items in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suitcases, inside the vehicle above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat folded down unless necessary.

5 69


VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.

Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's specifications and the certification label:

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR

(Gross axle weight rating)

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the certification label.

The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR

(Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s door sill.

5 70

What to do in an emergency

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3

• If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4

• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 6-8

• Low tire pressure indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

• TPMS malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

If you have a flat tire (with Spare Tire) . . . . . . . . 6-14

• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

• Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit) . . 6-22

• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

• Producing the tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . 6-27

• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

• Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

6

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

OPS063001

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using the hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.

6 2


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, set the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead.

Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control.

When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in P (Park, automatic transaxle) or reverse (manual transaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, follow the instruction provided later in this section.

If the engine stalls while driving

1.Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

2.Turn on your emergency flashers.

3.Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

✽

NOTICE

If there was a check engine light and loss of power or stall and if safe to do so to wait at least 10 seconds to restart the vehicle after it stalls. This may reset the car so it will no longer run at low power (limp home) condition.

6 3


IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly

1.If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.

2.Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.

3.Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged.

4.Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened.

5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

WARNING

If the engine will not start, do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could result in a collision or cause other damage. In addition, push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to overload and create a fire hazard.

If engine turns over normally but does not start

1.Check the fuel level.

2.With the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.

3.Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.

4.If the engine still does not start, call an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

6 4


EMERGENCY STARTING

Jumper Cables

(-)

(+)

(-)

(+)

Booster battery

Discharged battery

1VQA4001

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow these jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24volt power supply (either two

12-volt batteries in series or a

24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING

- Battery

Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or explode causing serious injury.

WARNING

- Battery

• Keep all flames or sparks away from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which may explode if exposed to flame or sparks.

If these instructions are not followed exactly, serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how to follow this procedure, seek qualified assistance. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid.

This is poisonous and highly corrosive. When jump starting, wear protective glasses and be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low; the battery may rupture or explode.

6 5


Jump starting procedure

1.Make sure the booster battery is

12-volt and that its negative terminal is grounded.

2.If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to come in contact.

3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.

4.Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1), then connect the other end to the positive terminal of the booster battery (2).

Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

CAUTION

- Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.

5.Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at

2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Push-starting

Vehicles equipped with automatic transaxle lock system cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

WARNING

Never tow a vehicle to start it because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.

6 6


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine will probably be too hot. If this happens, you should:

1.Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

2.Place the shift lever in P (Park, automatic transaxle) or Neutral

(manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3.If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

4.Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop).

WARNING

While the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.

5.If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.

6.If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

6 7


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

OPS063002

(1) Low tire pressure telltale /

TPMS malfunction indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added convenience feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function properly.

6 8


✽

NOTICE

If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure indicator do not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or engine is running, or if they remain illuminated after coming on for approximately 3 seconds, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

Low tire pressure telltale

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illuminated, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

If the telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible.

Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver’s side center pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire.

Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale may flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated after restarting and about

20 minutes of continuous driving at speed above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) before you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

6 9


WARNING

- Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.

TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System. Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible to determine the cause of the problem.

CAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cables or radios transmitters such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if snow chains are used or some separate electronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the


System (TPMS).

6 10


Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure telltale will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized

Kia dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

CAUTION

NEVER use a puncture-repairing agent to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. The tire sealant can damage the tire pressure sensor. If used, you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized

Kia dealer.

Even if you replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire

Pressure telltale will remain on until the low pressure tire is repaired and placed on the vehicle.

After you replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire, the TPMS malfunction indicator may illuminate after a few minutes because the

TPMS sensor mounted on the spare wheel is not initiated.

Once the low pressure tire is reinflated to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle or the

TPMS sensor mounted on the replaced spare wheel is initiated by an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tire pressure telltale will extinguish within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicator is not extinguished after a few minutes of driving, please visit an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION

If an original mounted tire is replaced with the spare tire, the

TPMS sensor on the replaced spare wheel should be initiated and the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel should be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel located in the spare tire carrier still activates, the tire pressure monitoring system may not operate properly. Have the tire with TPMS serviced or replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

6 11


You may not be able to identify a low tire by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure the tire's inflation pressure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold (from sitting stationary for at least 3 hours and driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that

3 hour period).

Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

CAUTION

Do not use any tire sealant if your vehicle is equipped with a


System. The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure sensors.

WARNING

- TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING

- Protecting

TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

6 12

This device complies with Part

15 of the FCC rules.


1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.


6 13


IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

Jack and tools (if equipped)

OPS063003

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment.

Pull up the luggage box cover to reach this equipment.

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling” while the vehicle is in motion, store it properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING

- Changing tires

• Never attempt vehicle repairs in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.

• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tire. The jack should be used on a firm level ground. If you cannot find a firm, level place off the road, call a towing service company for assistance.

• Be sure to use the correct front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

(Continued)

6 14


(Continued)

• The vehicle can easily roll off the jack causing serious injury or death. No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack; use vehicle support stands.

• Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

• Make sure any children present are in a secure place away from the road and from the vehicle to be raised with the jack.

Removing and storing the spare tire (if equipped)

Changing tires

OAM069008

Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise.

Store the tire in the reverse order of removal.

To prevent the spare tire and tools from “rattling” while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

1VQA4022

1.Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly.

2.Place the transaxle shift lever in R

(Reverse) with manual transaxle or

P (Park) with automatic transaxle.

3.Activate the hazard warning flashers.

6 15


1VQA4023

4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.

5.Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the jack position.

WARNING

- Changing a tire

• To prevent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.

• We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be blocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.

OPS063004

6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tire has been raised off the ground.

6 16


OPS063006

WARNING

- Jack location

To reduce the possibility of injury, be sure to use only the jack provided with the vehicle and in the correct jack position; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

OAM069009

8.Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 1 in. (30 mm).

Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for movement or slippage.

OPS063005

7.Place the jack at the front (1) or rear (2) jacking position closest to the tire you are changing. Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame.

6 17


9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can slide over the other studs.

WARNING

Wheels may have sharp edges.

Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub.

If there is, remove it. If the contact of the mounting surface between the wheel and hub is not good, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. This may cause serious injury or death.

10. To install the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.

11. Insert the wrench into the jack and lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise.

6 18


OPS063007

Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening every nut following the numerical sequence shown in the image until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, have an authorized Kia dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure.

If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, dust and dirt may get into the tire valve and air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible.

After you have changed the wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts.

Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used.

Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice-versa will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.

If in doubt, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

6 19


WARNING

- Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel. This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision resulting in serious injuries.

To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

WARNING

- Inadequate spare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to “Tires and wheels” in chapter 8.

Important - use of compact spare tire (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a conventional tire and is designed for temporary use only.

WARNING

The compact spare tire is for emergency use only. Do not operate your vehicle on this compact spare at speeds over

50 mph (80 km/h). The original tire should be repaired or replaced as soon as possible to avoid failure of the spare possibly leading to personal injury or death.

CAUTION

• You should drive carefully when the compact spare is in use.

The compact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare tire in use at the same time.

The compact spare should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).

✽

NOTICE

Check the inflation pressure after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, as necessary.

6 20


When using a compact spare tire, observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a higher speed could damage the tire.

• Ensure that you drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, such as a pothole or debris, could seriously damage the compact spare.

• Any continuous road use of this tire could result in tire failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible personal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 1 inch (25 mm), which could result in damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash while the compact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use tire chains on the compact spare tire. Because of the smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly. This could damage the vehicle and result in loss of the chain.

• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

• The compact spare tire should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other vehicle components may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.

6 21


IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

Introduction

CAUTION

- One sealant for one tire

When two or more tires are flat, do not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire.

OAM060013L

For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tire and the tire should be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

- Tire wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.

WARNING

- Temporary fix

Have your tire repaired as soon as possible. The tire may loose air pressure at any time after inflating with the Tire Mobility

Kit.

OPS063008

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture.

The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tire caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tire.

After you ensured that the tire is properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 200 km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of

(80 km/h) in order to reach a service station or tire dealer for the tire replacement.

6 22


It is possible that some tires, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tire repair method and is to be used for one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the suggested use of the Tire Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the road so that you can work with the

Tire Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake.

• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tires. Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tire can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.

• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be effective for tire damage larger than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm).

Please contact the nearest Kia dealership if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the Tire

Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a tire is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pressure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tire.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit unattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below -

22°F (-30°C).

6 23


Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

9. Hose to connect compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel

Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

WARNING

- Expired sealant

Do not use the Tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e.

pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tire failure.

0. Speed restriction label

1. Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction

2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel

3. Connectors and cable for the power outlet direct connection

6 24

WARNING -

Sealant

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Avoid contact with eyes.

• Do not swallow.

OAM060015L

4. Holder for the sealant bottle

5. Compressor

6. On/off switch

7. Pressure gauge for displaying the tire inflation pressure

8. Screw cap for reducing tire inflation pressure

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.


Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Detach the speed restriction label

(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and place it in a highly visible place inside the vehicle such as on the steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.

2. Screw connection hose (9) onto the connector of the sealant bottle.

3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is closed.

4. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing (4) of the compressor so that the bottle is upright.

OPS063008

6. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position 0.

OPS043204

7.Plug the compressor power cord into the front passenger side power outlet of the vehicle.

WARNING

Only use the front passenger side power outlet when connecting the power cord.

6 25


8. With the engine start/stop button position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to the Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant and will be checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the tire and stay away from the tire when filling it.

9. Switch off the compressor.

10. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle connector and from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

WARNING

- Carbon monoxide

Do not leave your vehicle running in a poorly ventilated area for extended periods of time.

Carbon monoxide poisoning and suffocation can occur.

CAUTION

- Tire pressure

Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tire pressure is below 29 PSI(200kpa).

This could result in an accident due to sudden tire failure.

Distributing the sealant

11. Immediately drive approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or, about

10min) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

While driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit, the tire pressure sensors and wheel may be damaged by sealant, remove the sealant stained with tire pressure sensors and wheel and inspect in authorized dealer.

6 26


Checking the tire inflation pressure

1.After driving approximately 4

~6miles(7~10km or about 10min), stop at a safety location.

2.Connect connection hose (9) of the compressor directly to the tire valve.

3.Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.

4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the recommended tire inflation.

With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pres-

sure : Switch on the compressor, position I. To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

✽

NOTICE

The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the compressor is running. To get an accurate tire pressure, the compressor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pres-

sure: Loosen the screw cap (8) on the compressor hose.

CAUTION

- Tire pressure sensor

When you use the Tire Mobility

Kit including sealant not approved by Kia, the tire pressure sensors may be damaged by sealant. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when you replace the tire with a new one and inspect the tire pressure sensors in authorized dealer.

Notes on the safe use of the

Tire Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the road so that you can work with the

TMK away from moving traffic.

Place your warning triangle in a prominent place to make passing vehicles aware of your location.

• To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake.

• Only use the TMK for sealing/inflation passenger car tires. Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.

• Do not remove any foreign objectssuch as nails or screws -that have penetrated the tire.

• Before using the TMK, read the precautionary advice printed on the sealant bottle!

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.

6 27


• Never leave the TMK unattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time or it may overheat.

• Do not use the TMK if the ambient temperature is below -22°F (-30°C).

• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety.

Technical Data

System voltage: DC 12 V

Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V

Amperage rating: max. 15 A

Suitable for use at temperatures:

-22 ~ +158°F (-30 ~ +70°C)

Max. working pressure:

87 psi (6 bar)

Size

Compressor: 6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.

(170 x 150 x 60 mm)

Sealant bottle: 3.3 x 2.8 ø in.

(85 x 70 ø mm)

Compressor weight:

1.77 lbs (0.8 kg)

Sealant volume:

12.2 cu. in. (200 ml)

6 28


TOWING

Towing service

dolly dolly

OXM069028

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

For trailer towing guidelines information, refer to “Trailer towing” in chapter 5.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground

(without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

WARNING

If your vehicle is equipped with side and curtain air bag, set the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed.

The side and curtain air bag may deploy when the ignitions is ON, and the rollover sensor detects the situation as a rollover.

6 29


OUN046030

OCM054034

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (front)

(if equipped)

CAUTION

Failure to place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.

OPS063009

1.Remove the towing hook from the tool case.

2.Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front bumper.

6 30


OPS063010

3.Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4.Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

Emergency towing

Front

Rear (if equipped)

OPS063010

OPS063012

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front (or rear) of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.

6 31


CAUTION

• Attach a towing strap to the tow hook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.

• Only use a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.

• Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadily and with even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

WARNING

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

• Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.

• If the disabled vehicle is unable to be moved, do not forcibly continue the towing.

Contact an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle during towing.

OPA067014

• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the middle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loose during towing.

6 32

Emergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the steering wheel isn’t locked.

• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

• Release the parking bake.

• Press the brake pedal with more force than usual since you will have reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, the brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often and let the brakes cool off.

• If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral.

Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the

ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes.

CAUTION

- Automatic transaxle

• If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front.

Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes.

• To avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle, limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph

(15 km/h) and drive less than

1 mile (1.5 km) when towing.

• Before towing, check the automatic transaxle for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment or towing dolly must be used.


6 33

Maintenance

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-23

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

• Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-47

• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75

• Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76

• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72

• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-83

• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-85

7

7

• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1.6L GDI

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Radiator cap

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Negative battery terminal

9. Fuse box

10. Air cleaner

OPS073001

7 3

Maintenance

2.0L GDI

7 4

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Radiator cap

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Negative battery terminal

9. Fuse box

10. Air cleaner

OPS073002

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have an authorized

Kia dealer perform this work.

An authorized Kia dealer has factory trained technicians and genuine Kia parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Kia dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽

NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record

Retention are the owner's responsibility.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. An authorized

Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service quality standards and receives technical support from Kia in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty & Consumer

Information manual.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

7 5

Maintenance

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an authorized Kia dealer with special tools.

✽

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Warranty & Consumer

Information manual provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized

Kia dealer.

WARNING

-

Maintenance work

• Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. You can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, have it done by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.

These can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury. Therefore, if you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry

(especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fans.

7 6

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

Check if the front of the radiator and condenser are clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt or insects etc. If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure. This could cause burns or other serious injury.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straightahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check the automatic transaxle P

(Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

7 7

Maintenance

At least monthly:

• Check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare.

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check the radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.

• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear and function.

• Check for worn tires and loose wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year:

• Clean the body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate the door hinges and checks, and hood hinges.

• Lubricate the door and hood locks and latches.

• Lubricate the door rubber weatherstrips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate the automatic transaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

7 8

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow the Normal Maintenance

Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow the

Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90°F (32°C).

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal

Maintenance Schedule. After 120 months or 150,000 miles continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

Maintenance

7 9

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

* 1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.

* 2 Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.

* 3 Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

* 4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

* 5 When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

* 6 If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

7 10

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

7,500 miles or 6 months

❑

Inspect air cleaner filter

❑

Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)

❑

Inspect cooling system * 1

❑

Inspect drive shaft and boots

❑

Inspect visually the following items.

1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

❑

Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)

❑

Add fuel additive * 6


❑

Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear


❈

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7 11

Maintenance



❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect visually the following items


2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid





7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)





12) Parking brakes



❑

Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑



(Continued)

7 12

(Continued)

❑



❑



❈


Maintenance



❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect fuel filter * 2

❑

Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

❑

Inspect fuel tank air filter * 2

❑

Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

(Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months)

❑

Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑



2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid





7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)





(Continued)

(Continued)

12) Parking brakes



❑

Replace air cleaner filter

❑


❑



❑



❑



❈


7 13

Maintenance



❑


❑


❑


❑


❑













12) Parking brakes



(Continued)

(Continued)

❑


❑



❑

Add fuel additive * 6 (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)

❑



❈


7 14

Maintenance



❑


❑


❑

Inspect drive belt * 4

(First, 60,000 miles or 72 months after every 15,000 miles or 24 months)

❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑









(Continued)

(Continued)





12) Parking brakes



❑


❑


❑



❑



❑



❈


7 15

Maintenance



❑


❑


❑


❑


(First 60,000 miles or 72 months after every 15,000 miles or 24 months)

❑


❑



❑









(Continued)

(Continued)





12) Parking brakes



❑


❑



❑



❑



❈


7 16

Maintenance



❑


❑


❑



❑


❑


❑


❑


❑

Inspect valve clearance (Engine 1.6) * 3


❑


❑









(Continued)

(Continued)





12) Parking brakes



❑


❑


❑



❑



❑



❈


7 17

Maintenance



❑


❑


❑


❑



❑


❑



❑












(Continued)

(Continued)


12) Parking brakes



❑


❑



❑



❑

Replace spark plugs (iridium coated),

❑



❈


7 18

Maintenance



❑


❑


❑



❑


❑


❑


❑


❑


❑











(Continued)

(Continued)



12) Parking brakes



❑


❑


❑

Replace engine coolant* 5

(First, 120,000 miles or 120 months after every 30,000 miles or 24 months)

❑



❑

Add fuel additive * 6 (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months)

❑



❈


7 19

Maintenance



❑


❑


❑


❑



❑


❑













12) Parking brakes



(Continued)

7 20

(Continued)

❑


❑



❑



❑



❈


Maintenance



❑


❑


❑



❑


❑


❑


❑


❑



❑


❑









(Continued)

(Continued)





12) Parking brakes



❑


❑


❑

Replace engine coolant * 5


❑



❑



❑



❈


No check, No service required

❑

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

7 21

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

DISC BRAKE/ PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/ LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER

ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BSALL JOINT

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

R

I

R

R

I

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

EVERY 3,750 miles OR 6 months

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

I

I

R

R

R

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 miles OR 6 months

EVERY 80,000 miles

EVERY 60,000 miles

MORE FREQUENTLY

DRIVING

CONDITION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K

C, E

A, B, H, I, K

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, D, E, F, G, H

A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

7

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving shorts distanse of less than 5miles in normal temperature or less than 10miles in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads

D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

22

E - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)

G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing

J - Driving over 100 MPH

K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter Fuel filter (cartridge)

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary.

Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections.

Fuel filters should be installed by an authorized Kia dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized Kia dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

7 23

Maintenance

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving components which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.

Cooling system

Check the cooling system components, such as the radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

Valve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authorized Kia dealer should perform the operation.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

Automatic transaxle fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions.

But in severe conditions, the fluid should be changed at an authorized

Kia dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this section.

7 24

Maintenance

Manual transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

✽

NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.

It is the normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color.

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to

DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever (or pedal) and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

For more information on checking the pads or lining wear limit, we recommend you to refer to the Kia website.

(http://www.kiatechinfo.com)

Exhaust pipe and muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid.

(Refer to

“Recommended lubricants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

7 25

Maintenance

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)

Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage.

Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt (or drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.

Replace or adjust it if necessary.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.

7 26

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level

■

Type A

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.

■

Type A

■

Type B

OAM072001

OPS073003

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.

WARNING -

Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.

CAUTION

• Do not overfill the engine oil. It may damage the engine.

• Do not spill engine oil, when adding or changing engine oil. If you drop the engine oil on the engine room, wipe it off immediately.

■

Type B

OAM072003

OPS073004

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components.

7 27

Maintenance

Use only the specified engine oil.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.



Engine oil contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm.

Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

7 28

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Removing radiator cap

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.

Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system.

When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

7 29

Maintenance

WARNING

The electric motor

(cooling fan) is controlled by the engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. It may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blades. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

If your vehicle is equipped with

GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan) may operate until you disconnect the negative battery cable.

OAM072005

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between F and L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion.

Bring the level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, see an authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycolbased coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

7 30

Maintenance

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

Ambient

Temperature

5°F (-15°C)

-13°F (-25°C)

-31°F (-35°C)

-49°F (-45°C)

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze

35

40

50

60

Water

65

60

50

40

WARNING

Radiator cap

OPS073005

Changing the coolant

Have the coolant changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.

CAUTION

Put a thick cloth around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as the alternator.

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure which may result in serious injury.

WARNING -

Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage the paint and body trim.

7 31

Maintenance

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID

Checking the brake/clutch* fluid level

CAUTION

-

Proper fluid

Only use brake fluid in brake system.

Small amounts of improper fluids (such as engine oil) can cause damage to the brake system.

OXM079008

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch* fluid contamination.

* if equipped

If the level is low, add fluid to the

MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings and/or clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake/clutch* system checked by an authorized KIA dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch* fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in chapter 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING -

Loss of brake/clutch* fluid

In the event the brake/clutch* system requires frequent additions of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized

Kia dealer.

7 32

WARNING -

Brake/ clutch* fluid

When changing and adding brake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake/ clutch* fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

CAUTION

-

Brake/clutch* fluid

Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.

Maintenance

7 33

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid level

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS073006

OPS073007

The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING -

Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals. Do not drink and avoid contacting windshield washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur.

7 34

PARKING BRAKE

Checking the parking brake

OPS053011

Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of

“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized Kia dealer.

Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of

44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

Maintenance

7 35

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement

OAM079043

It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be washed.

You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.

Clean the filter by using compressed air.

OAM079044

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.

OAM079046

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching clips.

7 36

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to

“Maintenance under severe usage conditions” in this chapter.)

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.

• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

Maintenance

7 37

Maintenance

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier.

When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

1. Open the glove box.

OPS073008 OPS073009

2. With the glove box open, remove the Air filter cover.

7 38

Maintenance

OPS073010

3. Remove the climate control air filter case by pulling out both sides of the cover.

OPS073011

4. Replace the climate control air filter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

✽

NOTICE

When replacing the climate control air filter install it properly.

Otherwise, the system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.

7 39

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection

1JBA5122

✽

NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic vehicle washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.

Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial vehicle washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

7 40

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade

1LDA5023

Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

2. Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

OHM078059

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

7 41

Maintenance

Rear window wiper blade

OHM078060

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull down the blade assembly and remove it.

OHM078061

3. Install the new blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

OHM078062

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the wiper blade assembly.

7 42

OHM078063

2. Install the new blade assembly by inserting the center part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized Kia dealer replace the wiper blade.

Maintenance

7 43

Maintenance

BATTERY

For best battery service

OXM079100

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

WARNING

-

Battery dangers

Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly combustible gas, is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive

SULFURIC ACID. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

(Continued)

If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel pain or burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery.

Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.

(Continued)

7 44

Maintenance

(Continued)

Pb

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.

• The electrical ignition system works with high voltage.

Never touch these components with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Failure to follow the above warnings can result in serious bodily injury or death.



Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm.

Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer.

Wash hands after handling.

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

CAUTION

If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.

7 45

Maintenance

WARNING

-

Recharging battery

When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).

• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

(Continued)

(Continued)

1. Turn off the battery charger main switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window

(See chapter 4)

• Sunroof (See chapter 4)

• Trip computer (See chapter 4)

• Climate control system

(See chapter 4)

• Clock (See chapter 4)

• Audio (See chapter 4)

WARNING

• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.

• The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected.

7 46

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures

All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure, refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter

8.

OXM079101L

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the driver’s side center pillar.

WARNING

- Tire underinflation

Severe underinflation (70 kPa

(10 psi) or more) can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control leading to severe injury or death. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

7 47

Maintenance

CAUTION

• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

WARNING

-

Tire Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure. This could result in loss of vehicle control and potential injury.

CAUTION

-

Tire pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than one mile (1.6

km) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gauge to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

7 48

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

WARNING

• Inspect your tires frequently for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.

• Worn tires can cause accidents. Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.

• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire. Kia recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter

8.

7 49

Maintenance

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

✽

NOTICE

Rotate radial tires that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left.

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare tire (if equipped) for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances.

This may cause unusual handling characteristics that could result in death, severe injury, or property damage.

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

CAUTION

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels.

Use only approved wheel weights.

7 50

Maintenance

Tire replacement

Tread wear indicator

OEN076053

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

WARNING

- Replacing tires

To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries from an accident caused by tire failure or loss of vehicle control:

• Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, and traction.

• Do not drive your vehicle with too little or too much pressure in your tires. This can lead to uneven wear and tire failure.

• When replacing tires, never mix radial and bias-ply tires on the same vehicle. You must replace all tires (including the spare) if moving from radial to bias-ply tires.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Using tires and wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehicle control, resulting in a serious accident.

• Wheels that do not meet Kia’s specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle or unusual handling and poor vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. The tire size affects wheel speed.

When replacing tires, all 4 tires must use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System) and

ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) to work irregularly.

7 51

Maintenance

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. Slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road to reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

7 52

Maintenance

Tire sidewall labeling

2

1

1

5,6

7

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

3

4

I030B04JM

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tires for your vehicle. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

P235/65R17 108T

108 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires marked with the prefix “P’’ are intended for use on passenger vehicles or light trucks; however, not all tires have this marking).

235 - Tire width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

7 53

Maintenance

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger vehicle tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed

Rating

Symbol

H

V

Z

S

T

Maximum Speed

112 mph (180 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1613 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2013.

WARNING - Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after approximately six (6) years of normal service.

Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or death.

7 54

Maintenance

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

7 55

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING - Tire temperature

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure. This can cause loss of vehicle control and serious injury.

7 56

Maintenance

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transaxle, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification

Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:

The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg).

7 57

Maintenance

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars," that show across the tread of a tire when only 2/32 inch of tread remains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality

Grading Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:

Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.

7 58

Maintenance

All season tires

Kia specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

Kia specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S

(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.

if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your vehicle with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires.

Tire chains

Tire chains, if necessary, should be installed on the front wheels.

Be sure that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

To minimize tire and chain wear, do not continue to use tire chains when they are no longer needed.

7 59

Maintenance

WARNING

- Snow or ice

• When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, drive at less than 20 mph (30 km/h).

• Use the SAE “S” class or wire chains.

• If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to avoid contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels.

In unavoidable circumstance, use a wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.59

inches (15 mm) to prevent damage to the chain’s connection.

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle.

Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical radial-ply tires should always be used as a set of four.

Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval shown in this section to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.

7 60

Maintenance

Low aspect ratio tire

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low aspect ratio tire is shorter than the normal, the wheel and tire of the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the instructions below.

- When driving on a rough road or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not damaged.

- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the tire condition or contact an authorized Kia dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tire, inspect the tire condition and pressure every 3,000km.

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize the tire damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even though you cannot see the tire damage with your own eyes, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.

• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.

7 61

Maintenance

FUSES

■

Micro mini type

■

Multi fuse

Normal

Blown

Normal

Blown

■

Cartridge type

Normal

Blown

OPS073054

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver’s side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will melt.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver’s side fuse panel.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: micro mini type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

WARNING

-

Fuse replacement

• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.

• Replace the fuse with the ignition “OFF”, switch off of all electrical devices and then separation (-) terminal from the battery in a safe place.

7 62

Maintenance

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

✽

NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items.

CAUTION

• When replacing a blown fuse or relay with a new one, make sure the new fuse or relay fits tightly into the clips The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause the vehicle wiring and electric systems damage and a possible fire.

• Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible fire. If fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts are blown, we recommend that you consult with an authorized Kia dealer.

• Do not input any other objects except fuses or relays into fuse/relay terminals such as a driver or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.

Inner panel fuse replacement

OPS073014

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

WARNING

Be careful not to hurt your hands when a fuse is replaced due to narrow space.

7 63

Maintenance

OPS073017

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the fuse puller provided on the engine compartment fuse panel cover.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.

Spare fuses are provided in the engine compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized

Kia dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the power outlet fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

Fuse switch

OPS073015

Always, put the fuse switch at the ON position.

If you move the switch to the OFF position, some items such as audio and digital clock must be reset and transmitter (or smart key) may not work properly.

7 64

Maintenance

CAUTION

• Always place the transportation fuse switch in the ON position while driving the vehicle.

• Do not move the transportation fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse switch may be worn out.

Engine compartment fuse replacement

✽

NOTICE

If you need to park your vehicle for prolonged periods more than 1 month, move the transportation fuse switch to the OFF position to prevent the battery being discharged.

OPS073016

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling the cover up.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION

After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover with using cover locking sound. If not, electrical failures may occur from water contact.

7 65

Maintenance

Multi fuse

OPS073039

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.

4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.

5. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

✽

NOTICE

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

7 66

Fuse/relay panel description

OPS073014

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

✽

NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

Maintenance

OPS073018

7 67

Maintenance

Inner fuse panel

Description

POWER OUTLET 2

ACC

POWER OUTLET 1

Fuse rating

20A P_OUTLET

10A

25A

Protected component

O_S_MIRR_SW, AMP, AUDIO/UVO/AVN 4.0_HEAD UNIT, BCM, TMU, MOOD_LAMP_UNIT,

SMK_UNIT, LDC_AMP(400W), LDC_AMP(200W)

C/LIGHT, REAR_P_OUTLET

DRL 10A

MODULE 6

WIPER FRT 2

WIPER RR

AMP

MODULE 5

WIPER FRT 1

HTD STRG

A/CON 1

HTD MIRR

7.5A

25A

15A

30A

7.5A

10A

15A

7.5A

10A

BCM(DAY_RUNNNIG_LIGHT_LAMP_POWER)

SUNROOF_MOTOR, LUGGAGE_PORTABLE_LAMP(CHARGE_POWER), SEAT_EXTN_DRV(HEAT-

ED), REAR_SEAT(IGN2)

FRONT_WIPER_MOTOR(POWER), FRONT_WIPER_RLY(LOW)

REAR_WIPER_MOTOR, MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), REAR_WIPER_RLY,

REAR_WIPER_RLY_COIL,

AMP, LDC_AMP(400W)

BCM, SMK_UNIT

MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), BCM(WASHER_MOTOR_POWER),

STEERING_HEATED

AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), IONIZER, PTC_RLY_COIL, BLOWER_RLY_COIL

OUTSIDE_MIRROR(HEATED), ECU(ELEC. LOAD DEFROST),

AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL/AUTO(HEATED_SIGNAL)

7 68

Maintenance

Description

T/GATE OPEN

S/HEATER FRT

DR LOCK

A/BAG IND

A/BAG

MODULE 4

STOP LAMP

MODULE 7

S/HEATER RR

P/WDW RH

P/WDW LH

MODULE 1

BRAKE SWITCH 1

MODULE 2

Fuse rating

15A


T/GATE_OPEN_RLY(T/GATE_LATCH_MOTOR), T/GATE_OPEN_RLY_COIL

20A

20A

7.5A

15A

10A

15A

FRONT_SEAT_EXTN(HEATED_POWER)

DOOR_LOCK_RLY, DOOR_LOCK_RLY_COIL, DOOR_UNLOCK_RLY_COIL, DEAD_LOCK_RLY,

DEAD_LOCK_RLY_COIL

CLUSTER

ACU, WCS_ECU

I_S_MIRR_ECM, AUTO_HLLD_ECU

HAZARD_SW(ESS_INDICATOR_POWER), STOP_SIGNAL_ELECTRONIC_MODULE

10A

20A

25A

25A

10A

SPORTS_MODE_SW(ATM_SHIFT_LOCK_SOLENOID), KEY_LOCK_SOLENOID

REAR_SEAT(HEATED_POWER)

FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)

FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)

BCM, SEAT_EXTN_DRV

10A

10A

ABS/ESP_UNIT, LDC_AMP(400W)

LOWER_SW, CENTER_SW, TPMS_UNIT, REAR_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR, SMART_PARK-

ING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR, SMART_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_UNIT,

AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), LANE_DEPARTURE_WARNING_SYSTEM_UNIT,

STOP_LP_SW, WATER_FUEL_SNSR

7 69

Maintenance

Description

MODULE 3

ECU

I.O.D 2

I.O.D 3

CLUSTER

TCU

I.O.D 4

Fuse rating

10A


SHIFT_LEVER_MODULE, REAR_SEAT_WARMER_SW, REAR_SEAT_WARMER, DIAGNOSIS, AVN

4.0_HEAD_UNIT, LDC_AMP(200W), TMU, HLLD_SW, HLLD_ACTR, OIL_LEVEL_SNSR,

7.5A

ENGINE_CONTROL_UNIT, AIR_FLOW_SNSR, START_RLY_COIL, SMK_UNIT, SMATRA_IMMOBI-

LIZATION

15A

7.5A

10A

LDC_AMP(200W), AUDIO/UVO/AVN4.0_HEAD_UNIT, TMU

OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY_COIL, OUTSIDE_MIR-

ROR_UNFOLDING_RLY, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_UNFOLDING_RLY_COIL

CLUSTER

15A

7.5A

SPEED_SNSR (MT), BACK_UP_LAMP_SW, OIL_PUMP_INVERTER, INHIBITOR,

TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT

OBDII(POWER), TPMS_UNIT(POWER), CLUSTER, AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), BCM,

REAR_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_BUZZER

SPARE 10A -

SUNROOF 2

P/SEAT DRV

20A

30A

SUNROOF_MOTOR(POWER)

FRNT_SEAT_EXTN(POWER)

SUNROOF 1

MDPS

A/CON 2

START

20A

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A

SUNROOF_MOTOR(POWER)

MDPS_UNIT

AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL(MAX_BLOWER), AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_AUTO(BLOWER_MOTOR)

E/R_FUSE & RELAY_BOX(RELAY - START / SUB START), PDM

7 70

Maintenance

Description

I.O.D 1

PDM 2

PDM 1

BRAKE SWITCH 2

Fuse rating

7.5A


GLOVE_BOX_LAMP, DOOR_WARNING_SW, OVER_HEAD_CONSOLE_LAMP, PERSONAL_LAMP,

SUNVISOR_LAMP, LUGGAGE_LAMP, PORTABLE_LAMP(DOOR)

7.5A

SMK_UNIT(BATT_CPU), SMATRA_IMMOBILIZATION(BATT)

20A SMK_UNIT(POWER)

10A STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_OPEN), SMK_UNIT

7 71

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

OPS073013

7 72

OPS073019

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

Description Fuse rating

IG1 40A


IGN_SW(B1), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG1), BUTTON_START_RLY(ACC)

BLOWER

RR HTD

ECU 2

40A

40A

30A

BLOWER_RLY, BLOWER_MOTOR

REAR_GLASS_HEATED_RLY,

MAIN_RLY, MAIN_RLY_COIL

ECU 3

IGN COIL

ECU 1

SENSOR 1

SENSOR 2

INJECTOR

B/UP LAMP

WIPER

F/PUMP

HORN

H/LAMP WASHER

15A

20A

20A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

15A

15A

20A

ECU(AFTER_AIN_RELAY)

IGNITION_COIL(POWER)

ECU(AFTER_MAIN_RELAY)

STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_CLOSE), O2_SNSR, PURGE_CONTROL_SOLENOID_VALVE, OCV,

-

CMP, COOLING_FAN_LOW_RLY_COIL

RR_COMBI_LAMP(BACK_UP_LAMP)

ECU(WIPER_SWITCH)

FUEL_PUMP_MOTOR

HORN_RLY, HORN_RLY_COIL, HORN

HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY_COIL, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_MOTOR

7 73

Maintenance

Description

B+ 1

B+ 2

B+ 3

IG2

MDPS

ALT

TCU

DEICER

ECU 4

ECU 5

A/CON

C/FAN

INVERTER

ABS 1

ABS 2

Fuse rating

50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+1)

50A

50A

40A

80A

SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+2)

SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+3)


IGN_SW(IG2), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG2), START_RLY

MDPS_UNIT

125A

20A

20A

15A

15A

10A

40A

50A

40A

30A

ALTERNATOR

TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT

DEICER

ECU(BATT_DIRECT)

ECU(BATT_DIRECT)

A/CON_RLY

COOLING_FAN_MOTOR, SUB_FUEL_PUMP, SUB_FUEL_VALVE

OIL_PUMP_INVERTER

ABS/ESP_UNIT(MOTOR)

ABS/ESP_UNIT(SOLENOID)

7 74

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

WARNING

-

Working on the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

Use only the bulbs of the specified wattage.

CAUTION

Be sure to replace the burnedout bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electric wiring system.

CAUTION

• If you don’t have necessary tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized Kia dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true if you have to remove the headlight assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlight assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

• Do not install additional bulb or LED. If you install that, the lamp may not be operated properly and fuse box or electric wiring system may have problem.

✽

NOTICE

After driving in heavy rain or washing, headlight and taillight lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and outside. This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside your vehicle during rain and doesn’t indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

7 75

Maintenance

Headlight, position light, turn signal light, side marker light and front fog light bulb replacement

■

Type A

■

Type B

OPS073020

OPS073021

(1) Headlight (High)

(2) Headlight (Low)

(3) Front side marker light

(4) Front turn signal

(5) Front position light

(6) Front fog light (if equipped)

If the headlight aiming adjustment is necessary after the headlight assembly is reinstalled, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

OHD076046

WARNING

- Halogen bulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

(Continued)

7 76

Maintenance

(Continued)

A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlight.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

WARNING -

HID

Headlight low beam

(if equipped)

Do not attempt to replace or inspect the low beam (XENON bulb) due to electric shock danger. If the low beam (XENON bulb) is not working, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Headlight (HID type)

If the light bulb is not operating, we recommend that you checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

✽

NOTICE

HID lamps have superior performance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps are estimated by the manufacturer to last twice as long or longer than halogen bulbs depending on their frequency of use. They will probably require replacement at some point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the headlamps on and off more than typical use will shorten HID lamps life. HID lamps do not fail in the same manner as halogen incandescent lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a period of operation but will immediately relight when the headlamp switch is cycled it is likely the

HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID lighting components are more complex than conventional halogen bulbs thus have higher replacement cost.

7 77

Maintenance

Headlight bulb (High)

■

Type A

OPS073051

OPS073046

4. Pull out the end of the front bumper.

5. Remove the headlight assembly from the body of the vehicle.

■

Type B

OPS073047

OPS073028

1. Turn off the engine and open the hood. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Disconnect the power connector from the back of the headlight assembly.

3. Loosen the retaining bolts.

If you can reach the bulb without removing the headlight assembly, you do not need to do step 3,4 and 5.

OPS073026

Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the previous page.

6.Remove the headlight bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

7.Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

7 78

Maintenance

8.Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining wire by depressing the end and pushing it upward.

9.Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly.

10. Install a new headlight bulb and snap the headlight bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.

11. Connect the headlight bulb socket connector.

12. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

13. Connect the power connector to the back of the headlight assembly.

14. Reinstall the headlight assembly to the body of the vehicle.

Headlight bulb (Low)

■

Type A

■

Type B

Low

High

OPS073047

OPS073023


6.Remove the headlight bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

7.Remove the bulb from the assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

8.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the housing and rotating in until it locks into place.

9.Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

7 79

Maintenance

Front turn signal/position light

■

Type A

■

Type B

Position&Turn signal

Turn signal

OPS073049

Position

OPS073024

Bulb type


6. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket.

8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

9. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly and turning the socket clockwise.

10. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

LED type

If the light bulb is not operating, have the vehicle checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

OPS073048

7 80

Maintenance

Front side marker Front fog lamp bulbs

(if equipped)

OPS073025


6.Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

7.Pull the bulb out of the socket.

8.Insert a new bulb into the socket.

9.Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots on the assembly and turning the socket clockwise.

OPS073028

OPS073027

1. Remove the front bumper under cover.

2. Reach your hand into the back of the front bumper.

3. Disconnect the power connector from the socket.

4. Remove the bulb-socket from the housing by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the housing.

5. Install the new bulb-socket into the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.

6. Connect the power connector to the socket.

7. Reinstall the front bumper under cover.

✽

NOTICE

If the headlight aiming adjustment is necessary after the headlight assembly is reinstalled, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

7 81

Maintenance

Side repeater light bulb Type A replacement (if equipped)

5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

6. Reassemble the socket and the lens part.

7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.


Side repeater light bulb Type B replacement (if equipped)

OPS073035

If the light bulb is not operating, have the vehicle checked by an authorized

Kia dealer.

OPS073033

1. Remove the light assembly from the vehicle by prying the lens and pulling the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.

3. Separate the socket and the lens parts by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the lens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

7 82

Maintenance

Rear combination light bulb replacement

■

Type A

(5) Tail light

(6) Tail/Stop light and side marker

(LED)

■

Type B

OPS073030

(1) Tail light and side marker

(2) Rear turn signal light

(3) Back-up light

(4) Stop and tail light

OPS073029

OPS073031

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Loosen the light assembly retaining screws with a philips head screwdriver.

3. Remove the rear combination light assembly from the body of the vehicle.

7 83

Maintenance

Tail light and side marker, Turn signal light and Stop and tail light

■

Type A

■

Type B

Tail and side maker

Tail

Turn signal

Tail and stop

OPS073032

5. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

7. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly and turning the socket clockwise.


Back-up light

Turn signal

OPS073034


7 84

Back-up

OPS073032

Back-up

OPS073045



Maintenance

5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

6. Insert a new bulb into the socket.

7. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots on the assembly and turning the socket clockwise.


High mounted stop light replacement

OPS073036

Bulb type

OPS073037

OPS073052

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Loosen the retaining bolts.

OPS073038

4. Pull out the module from the high mounted stop light assembly by pulling both clips.

5. Replace the bulbs by pulling it out.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order.

7 85

Maintenance

LED type (if equipped)

License plate light bulb replacement

OPS073053

5.Replace the LED with new one.

6.Reinstall in the reverse order.

OPS073050

1. Remove the lens by pressing the tabs.

2. Remove the socket from the lens.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter clockwise.

4. Install a new bulb in the socket and install the socket to the lens.

5. Reinstall the lens securely.

7 86

Map lamp

Room lamp

Glove box lamp

Maintenance

Luggage lamp

Vanity mirror lamp

OPS073041/OPS073042/OPS073043/

OPS073044/OXM079041

Interior light bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF” button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

CAUTION

Be careful not to dirty or damage the lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

7 87

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle’s finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

7 88

CAUTION

• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle.

Especailly, with high-pressure water. Water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

WARNING -

Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

Maintenance

OJB037800

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, acid detergents or strong detergents containing high alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts.

This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

7 89

Maintenance

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it.

The lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

7 90

Maintenance

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

Aluminum or chrome wheel maintenance

The aluminum or chrome wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum or chrome wheels. They may scratch or damage the finish.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed vehicle wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergents It may damage and corrode the aluminum or chrome wheels coated with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produce vehicles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

7 91

Maintenance

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle’s surface by moisture that evaporates slowly.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it dries slowly and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle.

Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from beginning by observing the following:

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

7 92

Maintenance

• When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours.

Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting and cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.

Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle.

These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. If necessary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product instructions for correct usage.

CAUTION

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

7 93

Maintenance

CAUTION

When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with a glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage of the rear window defroster grid.

7 94

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the

Warranty & Maintenance booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control systems, as follows.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

1. Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:

Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery) system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

7 95

Maintenance

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control

System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes.

Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING -

Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poisoning.

7 96

Maintenance



Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters

WARNING

- Fire

• A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle. Do not park, idle or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.

• The exhaust system and catalytic system are very hot while the engine is running or immediately after the engine is turned off. Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get burned.

Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control.

It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

7 97

Maintenance

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized Kia dealer.

• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

CALIFORNIA

PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

7 98

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6

• Recommended sae viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Consumer assistance (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Electrical equipment (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Reporting safety defects (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Online factory authorized manuals

(U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

8

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

DIMENSIONS

Item

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Front tread

Rear tread

Wheelbase

in (mm)

162.9 (4,140)

70.9 (1,800)

62.9 (1,600) * 1 /63.6 (1,615) * 2 /63.5 (1,612) * 3

205/60R16

215/55R17

62.1 (1,576)

61.7 (1,568)

235/45R18

205/60R16

61.4 (1,560)

62.5 (1,588)

215/55R17

235/45R18

101.2 (2,570)

62.2 (1,580)

61.9 (1,573)

* 1 without roof rack

* 2 with roof rack

* 3 with sunroof and roof rack

ENGINE

Item

Displacement cu. in (cc)

Bore x Stroke

Firing order

No. of cylinders

1.6L

97.1 (1,591) in. (mm)

3.03x3.36 (77x85.44)

1-3-4-2

4. In-line

2.0L

121.9 (1,999)

3.19x3.81 (81x97)

1-2-3-4-5-6

4. In-line

8 2


BULB WATTAGE

Front

Rear

Light Bulb

Headlamps (Low/High)

Headlamps (Low)

Headlamps (Low)-HID type*

Headlamps (High)

Front turn signal lamps

Front position lamps

Front fog lamps*

Front side marker

Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror)*

Rear Stop/Tail lamps (Bottom)

Bulb Type Rear tail lamps (Mid)

Rear tail lamps & side marker (Top)

LED Type

Rear Stop lamps

Rear Tail lamps & side marker

Rear turn signal lamps

Back-up lamps

High mounted stop lamps

License plate lamps

Map lamps

Room lamps

Interior

Personal lamps

Vanity mirror lamps

Glove box lamps

Luggage lamp

* If equipped

Wattage

55/60

55

35

55

28

8 (Opt : LED)

35

5

5 (LED)

28/8

5

5

LED

LED

27

16

5 (Opt :LED*)

5

8

8

LED

5

5

8

Bulb type

H13

H7SLL

D3S

H7LL

PY28/8W

PY28/8W (Opt : LED)

H8L

W5W

WY5W

P28/8W

W5W

W5W

LED

LED

PY27W

W16W

W5W (Opt : LED*)

W5W

FESTOON

FESTOON

LED

FESTOON

FESTOON

FESTOON

8 3


TIRES AND WHEELS

Item Tire size Wheel sizee

Inflation pressure bar psi (kPa)

Normal load

( )

Maximum load

( )

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tire

205/60R16

215/55R17

235/45R18

Compact spare tire

(if equipped)

T215/80D16

6.5JX16

6.5JX17

7.5JX18

4.0TX16

33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230)

60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420)

Wheel lug nut torque lb•ft, N•mk (g•m)

65~79

(9~11, 88~107)

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

8 4


CAPACITY/WEIGHT

Item

Gross vehicle weight

M/T

3,836 (1,740)

1.6 Engine

A/T

3,902 (1,770) lbs. (kg)

Luggage volume (SAE) cu ft (

l

)

Min : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.

Max : Behind front seat to roof.

2.0 Engine

M/T

3,902 (1,770)

A/T

4,100 (1,860)

Min : 24.2 (686)

Max : 61.3 (1,735)

8 5


RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant

Engine oil * 1 * 2

(drain and refill) recommended

(or equivalent)

1.6 Engine

Volume Classification

3.80 US qt. (3.6

l

)

API Service SM* 3 or obove

ILSAC GF-4 or above

ACEA A5 or above

Manual transaxle fluid

Automatic transaxle fluid

2.0 Engine

1.6 Engine

2.0 Engine

1.6 Engine

2.0 Engine

4.23 US qt. (4.0

l

)

1.9~2.0 US qt.

(1.8~1.9

l

)

2.0~2.11 US qt.

(1.9~2.0

l

)

API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life) or other brands meeting the GL-4 specitication approved by Kia Motors Corp.

7.71 US qt. (7.3

l

)

MICHANG ATF SP-IV

SK ATF SP-IV

NOCA ATF SP-IV

Kia genuine ATF SP-IV or other brands meeting the above specification approved by Kia motors corp.

* 1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

* 2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

* 3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

8 6


Coolant

Brake/Clutch fluid

Fuel

Lubricant

1.6 Engine

2.0 Engine

Volume Classification

M/T 5.39 US qt. (5.1

l

)

A/T

M/T

5.29 US qt. (5.0

5.39 US qt. (5.1

l l

)

)

Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water

(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

A/T 5.29 US qt. (5.0

l

)

0.7~0.8 US qt.

(0.7~0.8

l

)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

14.26 US gal. (54

l

) Refer to “Fuel requirements” in chapter 1

8 7


Recommended SAE viscosity number

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.

Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature

Gasoline

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Engine Oil * 1

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

10W-30

5W-20 (5W-30)

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM /

ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

8 8


VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

OUN088001

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor under the front passenger seat. To check the number, remove the cover

(1).

OVQ076002N

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

OUN086004

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver’s side center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).

8 9


TIRE SPECIFICATION AND

PRESSURE LABEL

ENGINE NUMBER

■

Engine 1.6

REFRIGERANT LABEL

(IF EQUIPPED)

ORB080005

OUN086005

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

■

Engine 2.0

OAM082007L

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

OPS073040

The refrigerant label is located on the underside of the hood.

8 10


CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)

Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current model year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is delivered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (inservice date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia

Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable to your model year vehicle.

KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment, the claims and/or service requests are excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

Toll free consumer assistance

Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).

For more information regarding assistance available, please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer

Information Manual.

Emergency roadside assistance

Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24 hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing

1-800-333-4Kia (4542).

Please note that you must provide your Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time of your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of your vehicle on the driver’s side, on the door jamb of the driver’s door, your vehicle’s registration or proof of insurance card.

Kia utilizes a network of over 17,000 roadside assistance providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia

Roadside Assistance Representative will dispatch someone to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tire with your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump to allow you to proceed to your destination. We have access to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to help you should you become locked out of your Kia.

In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehicle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s

Roadside Assistance Representative will arrange to transport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to an alternative service location.

8 11


Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this service. In the event that Kia does not have a dealer or an alternative service location available in a particular location, Kia will work with a reputable local service facility to ensure that you receive prompt service. Warranty repairs are performed at no cost.

✽

NOTICE

Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any

Kia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “salvage” title or similar “branded” title under any state’s law or has been declared a “total loss” or equivalent by a financial institution or insurance company.

Trip interruption

Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimbursement is included for meals, lodging, or rental vehicle expenses. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100 per day subject to a three day maximum limit per incident.

You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center to obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia

Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for trip interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the necessary arrangements.

Insurance deductibles, expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or other providers are not eligible for reimbursement.

Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under

Kia’s Trip Interruption Policy.

8 12


Registering your vehicle in a foreign country

If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country, you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle in a foreign country, you may experience the following problems and should therefore consider the possibility of having to deal with them:

1. The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.

If other than the specified fuel is used, it could cause damage to the engine, the fuel injection system, and other fuel-related parts which may not be covered under your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty.

2. We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave the country in which you purchased your Kia new and register it in another country, problems arising from the use of fuel other than the specified fuel are not subject to manufacturer’s warranty. Because vehicles like yours may not be marketed in the new country of registration, parts, servicing techniques and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be unavailable.

Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical specifications required by the government may vary enough from the country of purchase to cause additional problems.

3. There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area in which you plan to register your vehicle. You may additionally experience difficulty in obtaining services in a foreign country for any number of reasons.

Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for problems that result from unsatisfactory service or lack of service outside of the United States.

8 13


ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)

The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to perform under all reasonably expected operating conditions.

However, before any additional electrical equipment is installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia

Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your warranty.

Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehicle, including such systems as the engine control system, the audio system and the electrical charging system and thus potentially void all or part of your warranty.

We assume no responsibility for any expense you may incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its components or systems that may result from the installation of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied, or recommended for installation by, Kia.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly, or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer concerning the proper equipment and installation.

Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particularly the information under the headings "NOTICE",

"CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and defects please contact your Kia's toll-free Consumer

Assistance hot line as below:

National Consumer Affairs Manager

Kia Motors America, Inc.

P.O. Box 52410

Irvine, CA 92619-2410

1-800-333-4Kia (4542)

8 14


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(U.S. ONLY)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia

Motors America, Inc.

ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS

(U.S. ONLY)

The following publications are available on www.KiaTechinfo.com at no charge.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors

America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety

Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., West

Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Service manual:

This manual covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Electrical troubleshooting manual:

This manual complements the Service Manual by providing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.

Owner's manual:

This manual describes the overall features and operating procedures for the vehicle.

8 15

Index

II

Index

A

A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

When Active ECO is activated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Advanced lighting speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146

Air bag collision sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Air bag inflation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Air bag operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Air bags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Air bag collision sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Air bag inflation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111, 124

Airconditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102, 112

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

I 2

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93

Armrest (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

Aux, USB and iPod

® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145

Advanced lighting speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146

Auto light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Auto start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Auto stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-113

Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Sports mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Shift lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Shift-lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Ignition key interlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Aux, USB and iPod

® port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145

B

Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Battery replacement (Remote keyless entry) . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Battery replacement (Smart key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Parking brake - Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Brakes/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button . . . . . . . 5-10

Index

C

Capacities (Lubricants) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93

Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

Cargo weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Central door lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

ISOFIX system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110, 123

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . 4-52

Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Compact spare tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

I 3

Index

Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . 5-43

To resume cruising speed at more than approximately

20 mph (30 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following. . 5-44

Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

D

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Dashboard, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Day/night rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

Outside rearview mirror defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Front wiper deicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

I 4

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination . . 4-53

Displays, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger’s seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Central door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Drinks holders, see cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Driver's and passenger's front air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Driving at night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

E

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Emergency while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

Evaporative emission control System . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Engine Coolant Temperature guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Illuminated engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Evaporative emission control System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-23

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

F

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Index

Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

Fluid

Brakes/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Folding the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Front seat adjustment - power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Front wiper deicer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3

Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Fuse switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

Instrument panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63

Fuse switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Multi fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

G

Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

I 5

Index

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Engine Coolant Temperature guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Outside Temperature Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Glove box lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

H

Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Headlamp escort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Headlight bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78

Headlight position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Headrest(rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102



High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Hight adjustment (seat belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

I 6

Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

I

Ignition key interlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Illuminated engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Instrument panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93

Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135

Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

Luggage net holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Cargo area cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

Interior lamp auto cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Interior lamp auto cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Interior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Auto stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Auto start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Condition of ISG system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

ISG system deactivation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

ISG system malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Index

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Record your key number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,10

Battery replacement (Remote keyless entry) . . . . . . . 4-7

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7, 14

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Battery replacement (Smart key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

L

Label

Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

LCD modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

Master Warning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

A/V Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

I 7

Index

Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

LCD modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

LCD Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75

Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Headlamp escort. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Parking light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Headlight position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Auto light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

One-touch lane change function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

M

Maintenance

Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . 7-23

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108

Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111

Manual transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Master Warning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Day/night rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Moonroof, see Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

I 8

Mounting bracket for roof carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

Multi fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66

O

Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

ODS see the Occupant Detection System . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

One-touch lane change function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Outside rearview mirror defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Outside Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

P

Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Parking brake - Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Parking light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88

Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Power brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

Power window lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Index

R

Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

Rear center belt - 3 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 10

Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Replacement light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Rotation (Tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

S

Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135

Seat belt Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

I 9

Index

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Hight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

3 Point rear center belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Seat belt Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Seat cooler see air ventilation seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135

Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Front seat adjustment - power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Folding the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Headrest(rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Armrest (rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

Shift lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Shift-lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10, 14

Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Spare tire

Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

I 10

Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Compact spare tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Reducing the risk of a rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Sports mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Starting the engine with a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Electric power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Tilt and telescopic steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

FLEX STEER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60

Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 7-47

Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Compact spare tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Index

Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Low aspect ratio tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Removable towing hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

U

User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

V

Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . . . . . . 1-6

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

I 11

Index

Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

GVW (Gross vehicle weight). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

W

Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Power window lock button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125



Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Snowy or icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . 5-62

I 12

Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Change to "winter weight" oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

To keep locks from freezing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system . . 5-62

Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-63

Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-94